188
Installation Guide PUBLIC Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP22 Document Version: 2.7 – 2018-01-29 Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

  • Upload
    doanque

  • View
    257

  • Download
    7

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Installation Guide PUBLIC

Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP22Document Version: 2.7 – 2018-01-29

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Page 2: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Content

1 About this Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101.1 Naming Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111.2 Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121.3 Before You Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.4 SAP Notes for the Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131.5 New Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

New Features - Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14New Features - Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP21 and Lower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.1 Central System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.2 Distributed System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182.3 High-Availability System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192.4 ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202.5 Dialog Instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222.6 SAP Host Agent as a Separate Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

3 Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263.1 Planning Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263.2 Hardware and Software Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Running the Prerequisites Check in Standalone Mode (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Requirements for the SAP System Hosts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3.3 Planning User and Access Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.4 Planning for Independent ASPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.5 Basic Installation Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

SAP System Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36SAP System Database Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Additional Parameters for an SAP Web Dispatcher Installation Integrated in the ASCS Instance (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.6 SAP System Transport Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483.7 Planning the Switchover Cluster for High Availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

4 Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524.1 Preparation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524.2 Required File Systems and Directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

SAP Directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534.3 Using Virtual Host Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584.4 Performing Switchover Preparations for High Availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

2 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Content

Page 3: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

4.5 Preparation for IBM i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Installing the Toolbox JDBC Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Checking the Transport Directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Qp2Term, Qp2Shell, and the Portable Application Solution Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Installing the Qshell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Adjusting Startup Program QSTRUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Distribution of Libraries on ASPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Adding a User ASP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Configuring TCP/IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Adjusting the Relational Database Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Installing English as a Secondary Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Preparing an IBM i User Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Enable the User QSECOFR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4.6 Installing the SAP Front-End Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804.7 Preparing the Installation Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Downloading and Extracting the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 Archive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Using the Physical Media from the Installation Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Downloading Installation Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Copying the Installation Media Manually to Your IBM i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

5 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .905.1 Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905.2 Linking Global Directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955.3 Specifying the Initial Data Source of the User Management Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955.4 Prerequisites for Running the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965.5 Running the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985.6 Additional Information About the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Useful Information About the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Interrupted Processing of the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Entries in the Services File Created by the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Troubleshooting with the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Troubleshooting During the Database Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Using the Step State Editor (SAP Support Experts Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

6 Post-Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116.1 Post-Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116.2 Logging On to the Application Server ABAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126.3 Logging On to the Application Server Java. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146.4 Providing Access to the SAP NetWeaver Administrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156.5 Installing the SAP License. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1156.6 High Availability: Setting Up Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iContent P U B L I C 3

Page 4: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6.7 Configuring Remote Connection to SAP Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1176.8 Installing SAP Online Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176.9 Performing the Consistency Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186.10 Setting Up a Secondary Host for IASP Switchover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196.11 Setting Up the Transport Directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206.12 Configuring the Change and Transport System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216.13 Connecting the System to SAP Solution Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226.14 Applying the Latest Kernel and Support Package Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246.15 Performing Post-Installation Steps for the Application Server ABAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246.16 Installing Additional Languages and Performing Language Transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266.17 Configuring User Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276.18 Ensuring User Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286.19 Running the Configuration Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1346.20 Production Client Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356.21 Performing the Client Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366.22 Removing the Installation Files of the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376.23 Performing a Full Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386.24 Logging on to the SAP Web Dispatcher Management Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406.25 SAP Web Dispatcher Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

7 Additional Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437.1 Integration of LDAP Directory Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437.2 Multiple SAP Systems on a Single Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467.3 Dialog Instance Installation for an Upgraded System only: Updating Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487.4 Installing a Central or Distributed System Without the ASCS Instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507.5 Installing the SAP Host Agent Separately. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517.6 Splitting Off an ABAP Central Services Instance from an Existing Central Instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1537.7 Starting and Stopping SAP System Instances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Starting and Stopping SAP System Instances Using the SAP Management Console. . . . . . . . . . 156Starting and Stopping SAP System Instances Using Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

7.8 Creating a User for LDAP Directory Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627.9 Usage Type-Specific Initial Technical Configuration Done by the Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Initial Technical Configuration for SAP NetWeaver Application Server for Java (AS Java). . . . . . . 163Initial Technical Configuration for Process Integration (PI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

7.10 IBM i-specific Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Correcting Errors in RFC Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170IBM i Library Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171IBM i Integrated File System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Restoring a Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Editing Stream Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176RFC SDK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

7.11 Deleting an SAP System or Single Instances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

4 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Content

Page 5: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.12 Deleting an SAP System on IBM i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1817.13 Deleting an SAP Instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

A Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185A.1 Online Information from SAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iContent P U B L I C 5

Page 6: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Document History

NoteBefore you start the implementation, make sure you have the latest version of this document, which is available at https://support.sap.com/sltoolset System Provisioning Installation Option of Software Provisioning Manager .

The following table provides an overview on the most important document changes:

Version Date Description

1.0 2012-11-26 First version for Software Provisioning Manager 1.0

1.1 2013-04-02 Updated version

1.2 20132-04-22 Updated version

1.3 2013-10-28 Updated version

1.4 2014-03-17 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP09 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP12)

1.5 2014-07-07 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP06 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP11)

1.6 2014-11-24 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP07 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP12)

1.7 2015-04-27 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP08 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP13)

1.8 2015-05-27 Updated

1.9 2015-09-14 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP09 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP14)

2.0 2015-10-12 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP09 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP15)

6 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Document History

Page 7: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Version Date Description

2.1 2016-02-15 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP10 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP16)

2.2 2016-06-06 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP17 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP17)

2.3 2016-10-10 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP18 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP18)

2.4 2017-02-06 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP19 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP19)

● New Features:Verification of the integrity of data units in Software Provisioning Manager, documented in: Down­loading the Software Provisioning Manager Archive

2.5 2017-05-22 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP20 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP20)

● New Features:○ New SAPUI5-based user

graphical interface (GUI) “SL Common GUI”, documented in: Prerequisites for Running the Installer, Running the In­staller, Useful Information About the Installer

○ Cleanup of operating system users, documented in: SAP System Parameters, Creating Operating System Users and Groups

2.6 2017-09-11 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP21 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP21)

● New Features:○ Media Signature Check, docu­

mented in: New Features, Run­ning the Installer, Preparing the Installation Media .

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iDocument History P U B L I C 7

Page 8: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Version Date Description

2.7 2018-01-15 Updated version for software provision­ing manager 1.0 SP22 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP22)

● New Features:○ Signature check for installa­

tion archives, documented in: New Features, Downloading SAP Kernel Archives (Archive-Based Installation) Archive-Based Installation for Diagnos­tics Agent, Downloading the SAP Kernel Archives Required for the Dual-Stack Split (With­out Operating System and Da­tabase Migration), Download­ing the SAP Kernel Archives Required for Operating System and Database Migration

○ Installer Log Files Improve­ments, documented in: New Features, Useful Information about the Installer, Trouble­shooting with the Installer

○ Splitting Off an ABAP Central Services Instance from an Central Instance, documented in: New Features, Splitting Off an ABAP Central Services In­stance from an Central In­stance

● New Features section restructured: As of SP22, a dedicated subsec­tion for each new SP has been cre­ated. New features below SP22 re­main in a common table.

● The Java SDT GUI - which was in the SP21 version still available in parallel to the SL Common GUI - has been deprecated with SP22. As of SP22, SL Common GUI is the only available installer GUI :○ The following sections which

were explicitely related to Java SDT GUI were com­pletely removed from this documentation: Performing a

8 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Document History

Page 9: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Version Date Description

Remote Installation Remote Processing of the Installer ( Java SDT GUI only), Starting the Java SDT GUI Separately, Running the Installer in Acces­sibility Mode (general accessi­bility information was moved to Useful Information About the Installer).

○ The Java SDT GUI-specific in­formation was removed from the common installer sec­tions: Running the Installer, Useful Information About the Installer, Interrupted Process­ing of the Installer, Trouble­shooting with the Installer, De­leting an SAP System or Single Instances

● New section Using the Step State Editor (SAP Support Experts Only) added to section Additional Infor­mation About the Installer.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iDocument History P U B L I C 9

Page 10: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

1 About this Document

This installation guide describes how to install an SAP system based on the application server ABAP+Java (dual-stack) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.0 EHP2 using the installation tool Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP22 (“installer” for short), which is part of SL Toolset 1.0 SP22.

NoteSAP NetWeaver 7.0x Java Application Server reached end of maintenance by the end of 2017. SAP recommends upgrading to a more recent version. For more information, see SAP Note 1648480 .

This guide covers the SAP system products and releases listed in SAP Note 1680045 .

For information about supported operating system and database platforms for the SAP product you want to install, see the Product Availability Matrix at https://support.sap.com/pam .

NoteAs an alternative to using Software Provisioning Manager, you can install your system with a completely automated end-to-end framework available using SAP Landscape Virtualization Management. For more information, see SAP Note 1709155 and https://help.sap.com/lama .

NoteNote that for some products - such as SAP NetWeaver 7.0 - a complete system installation is only available for the highest support release. As for the lower support releases, only options for system copy and additional application server instances are provided.

CautionMake sure you have read the Before You Start [page 12] section before you continue with this installation guide.

Related Information

Naming Conventions [page 11]Constraints [page 12]Before You Start [page 12]SAP Notes for the Installation [page 13]New Features [page 13]

10 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

About this Document

Page 11: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

1.1 Naming Conventions

● Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 is the successor of the product- and release-specific delivery of provisioning tools, such as “SAPinst”.Before you perform an installation from scratch or a target system installation in the context of a system copy, we strongly recommend that you always download the latest version of the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 which is part of the Software Logistics Toolset 1.0 (“SL Toolset” for short). For more information, see Preparing the Installation Media [page 80].This way, you automatically get the latest version with the latest fixes of the tool and supported processes. For more information about Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 as well as products and releases supported by it, see SAP Note 1680045 and http://scn.sap.com/docs/DOC-30236 .“SAPinst” has been renamed to “Software Provisioning Manager” (“installer” for short) in this documentation, but the terms “SAPinst” and “sapinst” are still used in:○ The name of the technical framework of Software Provisioning Manager. For more information about

the SAPinst Framework, see SAP Note 2393060 .○ Texts and screen elements in the Software Provisioning Manager GUI○ Names of executables, for example sapinst○ Names of command line parameters, for example SAPINST_USE_HOSTNAME○ Names of operating system user groups, such as the additional group sapinst

● “installer” refers to Software Provisioning Manager.● “SAP system” refers to SAP system based on the application server of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 / 7.0 including

Enhancement Package 1 / 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2 / 7.0 including Enhancement Package 3.● “ABAP+Java system” refers to SAP system based on the application server ABAP+Java (dual-stack) of

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 / 7.0 including Enhancement Package 1 / 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2.● “Diagnostics” refers to diagnostics in SAP Solution Manager.● “Diagnostics Agent” refers to the agent of diagnostics in SAP Solution Manager.● SAP System ID

The SAP system ID is abbreviated to “SID” and “SAPSID” or “sid” and “sapsid”. For <sid> / <sapsid>, substitute your SAP system ID in lower case characters, for example, “prd”. For <SID> / <SAPSID>, substitute your SAP system ID in upper case characters, for example, “PRD”.

● Operating System NamesAs of operating system version IBM i 5.4, the operating system has been renamed from “IBM i5/OS” to “IBM i” (short form: “i”). The names of previous operating system versions remain unchanged.In this document, the name“IBM i” is used if we do not refer to a specific operating system version. If we refer to a specific version, we use the relevant operating system name.

● Database NamesAs of operating system version IBM i 5.4, the database has been renamed from “IBM DB2 for i5/OS” to “IBM Db2 for i”. In previous SAP documents, “IBM Db2 for i” was referred to as “IBM DB2 for i5/OS”, “IBM DB2 Universal Database for iSeries”, “IBM DB2 Universal Database for AS/400” or “DB2/400”.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAbout this Document P U B L I C 11

Page 12: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

1.2 Constraints

You need to consider the following constraints before you start your installation:

● Your operating system platform must be 64-bit.● As of SAP Business Suite 7 and SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 1, the installation of

dual-stack SAP Business Suite and optional dual-stack application systems is not supported. One exception to this rule is SAP NetWeaver Process Integration on a traditional database system, which still requires a dual-stack implementation.However, note that a single-stack SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Java (Advanced Adapter Engine Extended) offers almost all features of the classical dual-stack implementations. Therefore, you should investigate if a Java-only implementation of an SAP NetWeaver PI system is suitable for your use case. Due to the harmonized process orchestration stack (SAP NetWeaver PI and SAP NetWeaver BPM running on the same Java instance), many of the ccBPM features in an SAP NetWeaver PI system can be expressed using SAP NetWeaver BPM capabilities instead.For more information about the discontinuation of optional dual-stack deployments, see the SAP Community Network at http://scn.sap.com/docs/DOC-33703 .

1.3 Before You Start

Make sure that you have read the Master Guide for your SAP NetWeaver application or SAP Solution Manager and release before you continue with this installation guide.

The Master Guide is the central document leading you through the overall implementation process for your SAP system installation. It contains crucial information about the overall implementation sequence, that is activities you have to perform before and after the installation process described in this installation guide.

You can find a printed version of the Master Guide in your installation package or you can download the latest version from http://help.sap.com.

The following table lists the Master Guides of the SAP system applications for which you can use this installation guide, along with the available quick link or path to the appropriate download location:

Title Internet Address

Master Guide - SAP NetWeaver 7.0 http://help.sap.com/nw

<Including Enhancement Package> Installation and

Upgrade

Master Guide SAP Solution Manager <Release> http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager

7.1 <SP> Installation and Upgrade

12 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

About this Document

Page 13: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

1.4 SAP Notes for the Installation

You must read the following SAP Notes before you start the installation. These SAP Notes contain the most recent information on the installation, as well as corrections to the installation documentation. Make sure that you have the up-to-date version of each SAP Note, which you can find at https://support.sap.com/notes

SAP Notes for the Installation

SAP Note Number Title Description

1680045 Release Note for Software Provisioning Manager 1.0

Software provisioning manager 1.0 with installa­tion and system copy for SAP NetWeaver-based systems

1088980 Documentation: SAP Solution Manager Information about scenarios, configurations, implementation, upgrade, maintenance, secur­ity, sizing, end user usage, enhancements using Support Packages, or problem analyses with re­gard to SAP Solution Manager

1010428 End-to-End Diagnostics Information about availability and limitations of SAP Solution Manager End-to-End Diagnostics.

73606 Supported Languages and Code Pages Information on possible languages and lan­guage combinations in SAP systems

1067221 Composite SAP Note for heterogeneous in­stallation

This SAP Note and its related SAP Notes de­scribe the released operating system and data­base combinations for heterogeneous SAP sys­tems landscapes.

1990240 Support of mixed landscapes (Unicode and Non-Unicode)

Temporarily the system landscape is mixed with Unicode and Non-Unicode systems. You have third party software in your system landscape which does not support Unicode at all. You won­der whether such a heterogeneous system landscape is supported without restrictions.

1.5 New Features

The sections below provide an overview of the new features in Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 (the“ installer” for short).

Make sure that you also read the Release Notes for your SAP product at https://help.sap.com <Search your SAP Product> <Select your SAP Product Version> What’s New .

New Features - Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP22 [page 14]

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAbout this Document P U B L I C 13

Page 14: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The table in this section provides an overview of the new features in Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 available as of SP22 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP22).

New Features - Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP21 and Lower [page 14]The table in this section provides an overview of the new features in Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 available as of SP21 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP21) and lower.

1.5.1 New Features - Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP22

The table in this section provides an overview of the new features in Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 available as of SP22 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP22).

Make sure that you also read the Release Notes for your SAP product at https://help.sap.com <Search your SAP Product> <Select your SAP Product Version> What’s New .

Feature Description

Installer Log Files Improvements Installer log files are now available immediately after the installer has been started, that is before a product has been selected on the Welcome screen. For more information, see Useful Information About the Installer [page 102] and Troubleshooting with the Installer [page 107].

Splitting Off an ABAP Central Services Instance from an Existing Central Instance

With the installer option Split Off ASCS Instance from existing Central Instance, you can move the message server and the enqueue work proc­ess from an existing central instance to a newly installed ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance). The new ASCS instance is installed while the split is done. For more information, see Splitting Off an ABAP Central Services Instance from an Existing Central Instance [page 153].

1.5.2 New Features - Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP21 and Lower

The table in this section provides an overview of the new features in Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 available as of SP21 (SL Toolset 1.0 SP21) and lower.

Make sure that you also read the Release Notes for your SAP product at https://help.sap.com <Search your SAP Product> <Select your SAP Product Version> What’s New .

14 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

About this Document

Page 15: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Feature Description Availability

Media Signature Check

The signature of media is checked automatically by the installer during the Define Parameters phase while processing the Media Browser screens. As of now the installer only accepts media whose signature has been checked. See also the description of this new security feature in SAP Note 2393060 .

For more information, see Preparing the Installation Media [page 80] and Running the Installer [page 98].

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP21 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP21)

SL Common GUI with SAPINST 7.49

With the new installer framework version SAPINST 7.49, you can now use the new SAPUI5-based graphical user interface (GUI) “SL Common GUI”. For more information, see Useful Information About the Installer [page 102], Run­ning the Installer [page 98] .

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP20 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP20)

Cleanup of Operating System Users

You can now specify during the Define Parameters phase that the group SAPINST is to be removed from the operating system users after the execu­tion of the installer has completed.

For more information, see Operating System Users in SAP System Parameters [page 36].

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP20 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP20)

Verification of Integ­rity of Data Units in Software Provisioning Manager

The integrity of data units extracted from the Software Provisioning Manager archive is verified. For more information, see Downloading and Extracting the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 Archive [page 81].

In addition, check SAP Note 1680045 whether additional information is available.

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP19 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP19)

Option to install an SAP Web Dispatcher in an ASCS instance

You can now install an SAP Web Dispatcher in an ASCS instance. You can choose this option while running the ASCS instance installation.

For more information, see ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20]

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP18 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP18)

Diagnostics Agent The Diagnostics Agent is no longer installed automatically with the SAP sys­tem. The Install Diagnostics Agent check box on the Install Diagnostics Agent screen is no longer available.

You now have to install the Diagnostics Agent always separately. We recom­mend that you install it prior to the installation of your SAP system(s).

For more information, see the Diagnostics Agent Installation Strategy at­tached to SAP Note 1365123 , to SAP Note 1833501 , and to SAP Note 1858920 and the attached Diagnostics Agent Setup Guide.

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP10 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP16)

Feedback Evaluation Form available in the Software Provisioning Manager:

SAP SE’s aim is to provide fast and efficient procedures. To evaluate the pro­cedure you just carried out, we need information generated by the tool during process execution and your experience with the tool itself. A new evaluation form contains a simple questionnaire and XML data generated during the pro­cedure.

Port 4239 is used for displaying the feedback evaluation form. For more infor­mation, see the Prerequisites section in Running the Installer [page 98].

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP07 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP12)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAbout this Document P U B L I C 15

Page 16: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Feature Description Availability

Installation option ASCS Instance availa­ble for central and distributed system in­stallation

You can also choose to install the ABAP central services instance (ASCS in­stance) when installing a central system or distributed system based on SAP NetWeaver dual-stack (ABAP + Java). So far this was only possible for high-availability systems.

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP05 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP11)

Automatic user check of the QSECOFR and the IBM i installation user

The installer checks if the user QSECOFR and the IBM i installation user are prepared correctly. Only if the installer detects an inconsistency, then a dialog screen appears.

For more information about how to prepare these users, see Preparing an IBM i User Profile [page 78] and Enable the User QSECOFR [page 79] .

Software Provi­sioning Manager 1.0 SP20 (SL Tool­set 1.0 SP20)

16 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

About this Document

Page 17: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide

This section shows the installation options covered by this guide. You have to decide what exactly you want to install because the steps you have to perform vary according to the installation option you choose.

Related Information

Central System [page 17]Distributed System [page 18]High-Availability System [page 19]ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20]Dialog Instance [page 22]SAP Host Agent as a Separate Installation [page 24]

2.1 Central System

You can install a central system on a single host.

These are the following instances:

● ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance)○ SAP recommends installing the ASCS instance because this enables you to cluster the message server

and enqueue server separately from the central instance.However, you can also install your SAP system without the ASCS instance. In this case, follow the instructions in Installing a Central or Distributed System Without the ASCS Instance [page 150].

○ Optionally you can install the ASCS instance with an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher. For more information, see ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20].

● Central services instance (SCS instance)● Database instance (DB instance)

The ABAP stack and the Java stack use their own database schema in the same database● Central instance

Additionally, you can install one or more dialog instances. For more information, see Dialog Instance [page 22].

The following figure shows an example of SAP instances in a central system.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation Options Covered by this Guide P U B L I C 17

Page 18: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Central ABAP+Java System

2.2 Distributed System

In a distributed system, every instance can run on a separate host.

These are the following instances:

● ABAP Central services instance (ASCS instance)

NoteSAP recommends installing the ASCS instance because this enables you to cluster the message server and enqueue server separately from the central instance.

However, you can also install your SAP system without the ASCS instance. In this case, follow the instructions in Installing a Central or Distributed System Without the ASCS Instance [page 150].

Optionally, you can install the ASCS instance with an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher. For more information, see ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20].

● Central services instance (SCS instance)● Database instance (DB instance)

The ABAP stack and the Java stack use their own database schema in the same database.● Central instance

NoteYou can also use the SAP transport host or the SAP global host as your central instance host.

Optionally, you can install one or more dialog instances. For more information, see Installation of a Dialog Instance [page 22].

18 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation Options Covered by this Guide

Page 19: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The following figure assumes the following:

● The ASCS instance and the SCS instance run on the SAP global host. The SAP global host is the host where the global file system /<sapmnt> resides. For more information, see SAP Directories [page 53].

● The global transport directory resides on a separate SAP transport host. For more information, see SAP Transport Host [page 48].

Distributed ABAP+Java System

2.3 High-Availability System

In a high-availability system, every instance can run on a separate host.

These are the following instances:

● ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance)Optionally you can install the ASCS instance with an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher. For more information, see ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20].

● Enqueue replication server instance (ERS instance) for the ASCS instance● Central services instance for Java (SCS instance)● Enqueue replication server instance (ERS instance) for the SCS instance● Database instance

The ABAP stack and the Java stack use their own database schema in the same database● Central instance

We recommend that you run both the ASCS instance and the SCS instance in a switchover cluster infrastructure.

To increase high-availability by creating redundancy, we recommend that you install dialog instances on hosts different from the central instance host. For more information, see Installation of a Dialog Instance [page 22].

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation Options Covered by this Guide P U B L I C 19

Page 20: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The following figure shows an example for the distribution of the SAP instances in a high-availability system.

High-Availability System

2.4 ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher

You can install an SAP Web Dispatcher integrated in the ASCS instance.

If you select this option, an SAP Web Dispatcher is installed running within the ASCS instance. No separate SAP Web Dispatcher instance and no dedicated <SAPSID> are created for the SAP Web Dispatcher. We recommend this if you want to use the SAP Web Dispatcher for the system to which the ASCS instance belongs.

Note

We only recommend this option for special scenarios. For more information, see SAP Note 908097 . For an SAP Web Dispatcher installation, a standalone installation (see below) continues to be the default scenario.

NoteAn ASCS instance for IBM Db2 for i is only installed on IBM i.

20 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation Options Covered by this Guide

Page 21: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher

The SAP Web Dispatcher is located between the Web client (browser) and your SAP system that is running the Web application.

It acts as single point of entry for incoming requests (HTTP, HTTPS), defined by the IP address, port, and URL, and forwards them in turn to the application server (AS) of the SAP system.

The SAP Web Dispatcher receives information about the SAP system that it needs for load distribution (load balancing) from the message server and application server via HTTP.

Installation of “Standalone” SAP Web Dispatcher with its own <SAPSID> and Instance

If you want to install an SAP Web Dispatcher for another system - that is not for the system for which you use the ASCS instance and with its own SAP system ID and instance number - you have to install SAP Web Dispatcher separately as described in the documentation which you can find under http://help.sap.com/sltoolset System Provisioning Installation Option of Software Provisioning Manager Guide for SAP Web Dispatcher for SAP NetWeaver 7.0 or Higher .

More Information

For more information about the architecture and the functions of SAP Web Dispatcher, see the SAP Library at: http://help.sap.com/nw70 <Enhancement Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation Options Covered by this Guide P U B L I C 21

Page 22: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management SAP Web Dispatcher

2.5 Dialog Instance

You can install one or more dialog instances for an existing SAP system. Dialog instances are optional and can be installed on separate hosts.

A dialog instance can run on:

● The host of any instance of the existing SAP system (exceptions see below)● On a dedicated host

NoteIf you install a dialog instance in an existing non-Unicode system (that has been upgraded to the current release), the dialog instance is automatically installed as a non-Unicode instance. The installer determines if a non-Unicode system exists and chooses the correct executables for the system type.

Dialog Instance for a Central System

The following figure shows a central system with dialog instances that run:

● On the main host of the SAP system, that is, on the host on which the central instance and the database instance run

● On dedicated hosts

22 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation Options Covered by this Guide

Page 23: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Dialog Instance for a Central ABAP+Java System

For more information, see Central System [page 17].

Dialog Instance for a Distributed System

Dialog Instance for a Distributed ABAP+Java System

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation Options Covered by this Guide P U B L I C 23

Page 24: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

For more information, see Distributed System [page 18].

Dialog Instance for a High-Availability System

The following figure shows a high-availability system with dialog instances that run on:

● The host of the central instance● Dedicated hosts

Dialog Instance for a High-Availability System

For more information, see High-Availability System [page 19].

2.6 SAP Host Agent as a Separate Installation

Under certain circumstances you need to install SAP Host Agent separately.

SAP Host Agent is an agent that can accomplish several life-cycle management tasks, such as operating system monitoring, database monitoring, system instance control and provisioning. When you install a new SAP system or instance, the SAP Host Agent is in most cases installed automatically on the SAP system or instance host.

It is only required to install the SAP Host Agent separately if one of the following is true:

● There is no SAP system or instance on the host.

24 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation Options Covered by this Guide

Page 25: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● The SAP system or instance running on the host has a kernel release lower than SAP kernel 7.20 and the host does not yet have an SAP Host Agent. During the installation of new SAP instances with SAP kernel 7.20 or higher, the SAP Host Agent is installed automatically (integrated installation).

● You have upgraded your SAP system to a release with a kernel release lower than SAP kernel 7.20 and the host of the upgraded system or instance does not yet have an SAP Host Agent.

The section Installing the SAP Host Agent Separately [page 151] describes how to perform the installation.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation Options Covered by this Guide P U B L I C 25

Page 26: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

3 Planning

3.1 Planning Checklist

This section includes the planning steps that you have to complete for the following installation options.

● Central, distributed, or high-availability system● Dialog instance

Detailed information about the steps are available in the linked sections.

Prerequisites

1. You have planned your SAP system landscape according to the Master Guide available at the appropriate download location as described in Before You Start [page 12].

2. You have decided on your installation option (see Installation Options Covered by this Guide [page 17]).

Central, Distributed, or High-Availability System

1. You check the hardware and software requirements [page 27] for each installation host.2. You plan how to set up user and access management [page 34].3. You plan for independent ASPs [page 34].4. You identify Basic SAP System Installation Parameters [page 35].5. You decide on the transport host to use [page 48].6. To install a high-availability system, you read Planning the Switchover Cluster for High Availability [page

49].7. Optionally, you decide whether you want to install multiple SAP systems on a single host [page 146].8. Continue with Preparation [page 52].

Dialog Instance

1. You check the hardware and software requirements [page 27] for the installation host on which you want to install one or more dialog instances.

2. You identify Basic SAP System Installation Parameters [page 35].3. Continue with Preparation [page 52].

26 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 27: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

Ensure that your hosts meet the hardware and software requirements for your operating system and the SAP instances. Otherwise, you might experience problems when working with the SAP system.

Prerequisites

● Make sure that the host name meets the requirements listed in SAP Note 611361 .● Contact your OS vendor for the latest OS patches.

Procedure

1. Check the Product Availability Matrix at http://support.sap.com/pam for supported operating system releases.

2. Check the hardware and software requirements using:○ The Prerequisite Checker in one of two modes:

○ Standalone mode (optional) before the installation processFor more information, see Running the Prerequisite Checker Standalone [page 27].

○ Integrated in the installer (mandatory) during the installation processFor more information, see Running the Installer [page 98].

○ The hardware and software requirements tables in Requirements for the SAP System Hosts [page 28].

3. If you want to install a production system, the values provided by the Prerequisite Checker and the hardware and software requirements checklists are not sufficient. In addition, do the following:

○ You use the Quick Sizer tool available at http://sap.com/sizing .○ You contact your hardware vendor, who can analyze the load and calculate suitable hardware sizing

depending on:○ The set of applications to be deployed○ How intensively the applications are to be used○ The number of users

3.2.1 Running the Prerequisites Check in Standalone Mode (Optional)

When you install an SAP system, the installer automatically starts the prerequisites check, which checks the hardware and software requirements in the background. As an optional step during planning, you can also run the prerequisites check in standalone mode to check the hardware and software requirements for your operating system (OS) and the SAP instances before the actual installation.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 27

Page 28: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Context

RecommendationWe recommend that you use both the Prerequisites Check and the requirements tables for reference.

Procedure

1. Download and unpack the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive to a local directory and make the SAP kernel media available as described in Preparing the Installation Media [page 80].

2. Start the installer as described in Running the Installer [page 98].

3. On the Welcome screen, choose <Product> Software Life-Cycle Options Additional Preparation Options Prerequisites Check .

4. Follow the instructions in the installer dialogs and enter the required parameters.

NoteFor more information about each parameter, position the cursor on the parameter field and choose F1 in the installer.

After you have finished, the Parameter Summary screen appears. This screen summarizes all parameters that you have entered and that you want to have checked. If you want to make a change, select the relevant parameters and choose Revise.

5. To start the prerequisites check, choose Next.

Results

The Prerequisite Checker Results screen displays the results found. If required, you can also check the results in file prerequisite_checker_results.html, which you can find in the installation directory.

3.2.2 Requirements for the SAP System Hosts

Every installation host must meet at least the requirements listed in the following tables. Most of the requirements are valid for every installation host whereas some requirements are instance-specific and are marked accordingly.

If you have any questions, contact the person in charge of the installation, your Competence Center, or your local IBM representative.

28 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 29: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Related Information

General Installation Information for Your Operating System [page 29]Hardware Requirements [page 29]Software Requirements [page 31]Other Requirements [page 33]

3.2.2.1 General Installation Information for Your Operating System

Before checking the hardware and software requirements, we recommend that you make yourself familiar with some general information about installation of SAP systems on your operating system platform.

3.2.2.2 Hardware Requirements

Every installation host must meet at least the hardware requirements listed in the following tables. Most of the requirements are valid for every installation host whereas some requirements are instance-specific and are marked accordingly.

Hardware Requirements

Requirement Values and Activities

Hardware requirements ● Media drive (on the installer GUI host)● Before installing an SAP system on IBM i, you must obtain detailed sizing information

from your IBM representative.

The amount of space required for an SAP system on IBM i is dependent on many variables, such as:

● Size of the database● Number of work processes● Number of users

Sizing recommendations are made by the IBM Competency Center. We recommend that aux­iliary storage pool (ASP) usage in SAP production systems is 70% or less.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 29

Page 30: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Requirement Values and Activities

Hard disk space ● General requirements:○ 4.3 GB of temporary disk space for every required installation medium that you have

to copy to a local hard disk. For more information, see Preparing the Installation Me­dia [page 80].

○ 1.2 GB of temporary disk space for the installation.○ If an advanced disk array is available (for example, RAID), contact your hardware

vendor to make sure that the data security requirements are covered by this tech­nology.

● Instance-specific requirements:If you install several instances on one host, you have to add up the requirements accord­ingly.○ Central services instance (SCS instance)

2 GB○ Enqueue replication server instance for the SCS instance (high-availability only)

2 GB○ ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance)

2 GBIf you install the ASCS instance with an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher, for the in­stallation as such you require at least 1 GB of hard disk space in addition. For pro­duction use of the SAP Web Dispatcher, you need to reserve at least 5 GB.

○ Enqueue replication server instance for the ASCS instance (high-availability only)2 GB

○ Database instance:Minimum 50 GB

○ Central instance:6 GB

○ Dialog instance:6 GB

○ SAP Host Agent:0.5 GB

RAM 11 GB

30 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 31: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

3.2.2.3 Software Requirements

Every installation host must meet at least the software requirements listed in the following tables. Most of the requirements are valid for every installation host whereas some requirements are instance-specific and are marked accordingly.

Software Requirements

Requirement Values and Activities

Operating System Requirements The SAP products based on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR3, SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP1 and SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP2 are released for V6R1,V7R1 and V7R2, and V7R3.

The SAP products based on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP3 are released for V7R1,V7R2, and V7R3.

For information about which operating system versions have been released for SAP on IBM i, see the Product Availability Matrix (PAM) at http://support.sap.com/pam and search for <Product> then choose <Product>. On the Database Platforms tab, you see the supported releases under DB2/400 ....

OS/400 ... .

For information about which operating system versions have been released for SAP on IBM i, see the following:

● For more information about V6R1, see SAP Note 1148480 .

● For more information about V7R1, see SAP Note 1432783 .

● For more information about V7R2, see SAP Note 2011710 .

● For more information about V7R3, see SAP Note 2299407 .

PTF and Information APAR

For the latest information on cumulative PTF package (CUM package) release lev­els and operating system corrections related to SAP products on IBM Db2 for i, see the following IBM information APARs:

● APAR II14362 (V6R1M0)● APAR II14535 (V6R1M1)● APAR II14536 (V7R1M0)● APAR II14741 (V7R2M0)● APAR II14816 (V7R3M0)

To load an information APAR onto your IBM i using the IBM Electronic Customer Support (ECS) link, enter:

SNDPTFORD PTFID((<Info_APAR_ID>))

ExampleTo load the information APAR for V7R2M0, enter:

SNDPTFORD PTFID(II14741)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 31

Page 32: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Requirement Values and Activities

For more information about releases and PTFs for SAP on IBM i and the address where you can find the information APARs, see SAP Note 83292 .

CautionMake sure that English is installed as the primary or secondary language. For more information, see Installing English as a Secondary Language [page 78].

To run an SAP system on IBM i with ASCII code pages, make sure that you have installed 57nnSS1 option 21 – Extended NLS Support. This option is delivered to you by IBM with the installation media of the operating system.

For more information about how to install the secondary language, see the IBM documentation AS/400 National Language Support (SC41-5101-01)

Other Products

The following products are required:

Notexx = 61 (V6R1) and xx = 70 (V7R1, V7R2 and V7R3)

● 57<xx>TC1 option *BASE – IBM TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities for i

● 57<xx>SS1 option *BASE – i5/OS

● 57<xx>SS1 option 1 – Extended Base Support

● 57<xx>SS1 option 2 – Online Information

● 57<xx>SS1 option 3 – Extended Base Directory Support

● 57<xx>SS1 option 12 – Host Servers

● 57<xx>SS1 option 13 – System Openness Includes

● 57<xx>SS1 option 21 – Extended NLS Support

● 57<xx>SS1 option 30 – Qshell

● 57<xx>SS1 option 33 – Portable Application Solutions Environment (PASE)

National Language Support (NLS) Make sure that National Language Support (NLS) and corresponding locales are installed.

32 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 33: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

3.2.2.4 Other RequirementsEvery installation host must meet at least the requirements listed in the following tables. Most of the requirements are valid for every installation host whereas some requirements are instance-specific and are marked accordingly.

Other Requirements

Requirement Values and Activities

Minimum Web Browser Make sure that you have at least one of the following web browsers installed on the host where you run the installer GUI:

● Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 or higher● Microsoft Edge● Mozilla Firefox● Google Chrome

Always use the latest version of these web browsers

You need a web browser to be able to run the SL Common GUI, and to display the Evaluation Form and send it to SAP.

Host Name To find out physical host names, open a command prompt and enter hostname.

NoteInstead of using the command prompt, you CALL QP2TERM on IBM i.

For more information about the allowed host name length and characters allowed for SAP system instance hosts, see SAP Note 611361 .

If you want to use virtual host names, see SAP Note 962955 .

Login Shell The installer only prompts you for this parameter if you use a login shell other than the recom­mended C shell (csh).

For more information, see SAP Note 202227 .

On IBM i, you do not have to add or change any entry in the login shell input field.

Shared file systems for de­centralized systems

If application servers are installed decentralized, then a “shared” file system must be instal­led, for example Network File System (NFS).

Installer GUI Host Windows or Linux PC to start the installer GUI

Other Requirements Make sure the local relational database name (RDB name) of your system equals the host’s TCP/IP name. To do so, compare the following values:

● On a WRKRDBDIRE screen, use the relational database name where remote location equals *LOCAL.

● On a CHGTCPDMN command prompt, look at the value of HOSTNAME.

For more information, see Adjusting the Relational Database Name (RDB name) [page 77].

IBM Db2 for i

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 33

Page 34: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The IBM Db2 for i is fully integrated into the operating system. No separate installation phase is required for the database code and database tools.

3.3 Planning User and Access Management

You have to plan how you want to configure user and access management for your SAP system to be installed.

Before you add a newly installed SAP system to your system landscape, you must decide which kind of user management you want to use:

● The user administration of the AS ABAP● Use an LDAP directory as the data source for user data.

Procedure

To specify the initial data source of the User Management Engine (UME), proceed as described in Specifying the Initial Data Source of the User Management Engine [page 95]

More Information

For more information about configuring the user management of your SAP system to be installed, see the SAP Library at

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Application HelpSAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Identity Management Identity Management for System Landscapes Integration of User Management in Your System Landscape

3.4 Planning for Independent ASPs

Independent ASPs (IASPs) are user ASPs that can be varied offline or online independent of the rest of the server storage. You can switch IASPs between IBM i servers or partitions. Planned and unplanned downtimes are part of every system landscape. Try to reduce offline times for tasks such as system backups, software upgrades, and application and database management to a minimum.

Installing an SAP system on an IASP in combination with virtual hostnames and cluster services allow you to move SAP systems between different physical hosts and provides the most convenient combination between high availability and simplicity for SAP on IBM i. A switchable IASP configuration allows the customer to take advantage of other high-availability solutions such as geographic mirroring or cross-site mirroring.

34 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 35: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

RecommendationContact your IBM provider for the best recommendations based on your environment.

To ensure a successful installation on an IASP and to take full advantage of the benefits it provides, you must plan for the following activities:

● You set up the IASP with the required configuration.

NoteIf a switchable environment is required, make sure you can move this IASP between the primary and secondary host.

● You set up an IP for both systems and set the virtual host.

RecommendationWe recommend that you install the system using a virtual hostname. If you change the hostname of an already installed system an error can occur.

● You use the IBM System i Navigator to set up the clustering services, which you need for administrating the systems.

● You install the SAP system into the primary host using the required IASP.

NoteMake sure you use installer option SAPINST_USE_HOSTNAME to set your virtual hostname.

● You follow the steps as described in Setting Up a Secondary Host for IASP Switchover [page 119].

3.5 Basic Installation Parameters

The installer prompts for input parameters during the Define Parameters phase of the installation.

You can install your SAP system either in Typical or Custom mode:

● TypicalIf you choose Typical, you perform the installation with default settings. This means that the installer prompts you only for a small selection of input parameters. These parameters include at least the following:○ SAP System ID and Database Connectivity Parameters○ SAP system profile directory – only for systems with instances on separate hosts○ Master password○ System Landscape Directory (SLD) destination

For more information about the parameters, see the corresponding tables below in this document. If you want to change any of the default settings, you can do so on the Parameter Summary screen.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 35

Page 36: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● CustomIf you choose Custom, you are prompted for all parameters. At the end, you can still change any of these parameters on the Parameter Summary screen.

NoteIf you want to install an ASCS instance with an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher instance [page 20], you must choose Custom. Otherwise, you are not prompted for the SAP Web Dispatcher installation parameters [page 47] during the Define Parameters phase.

NoteYou cannot change from Custom to Typical mode or from Typical to Custom mode on the Parameter Summary screen.

The tables in the sections below list the basic system parameters that you need to specify before installing your SAP system. For all other installation parameters, use the tool help on the installer screens.

Related Information

SAP System Parameters [page 36]SAP System Database Parameters [page 46]Additional Parameters for an SAP Web Dispatcher Installation Integrated in the ASCS Instance (Optional) [page 47]

3.5.1 SAP System Parameters

The tables in this section lists the basic SAP system installation parameters that you need to specify before installing your SAP system. For all other installation parameters, use the tool help on the installer screens.

General Parameters

Parameter Definition

Unicode System Every new installation of an SAP system is Unicode.

You can only deselect this option if you perform the system copy for a non-Unicode SAP sys­tem that has been upgraded to the current release.

If you install a dialog instance in an existing non-Unicode system (that has been upgraded to the current release), the dialog instance is installed automatically as a non-Unicode instance. The installer checks whether a non-Unicode system exists and chooses the right executables for the system type.

36 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 37: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameter Definition

SAP System ID <SAPSID> The SAP System ID <SAPSID> identifies the whole SAP system.

CautionChoose your SAP system ID carefully since renaming requires considerable effort.

Make sure that your SAP system ID:

● Is unique throughout your organization. Do not use an existing <SAPSID> when installing a new SAP system.

ExampleIf you have already installed an ABAP system and you want to install a new Java sys­tem on the same host, make sure that you enter a <SAPSID> that is different from the <SAPSID> of the existing ABAP system. The <SAPSID> of a Java stack can only by equal to the <SAPSID> of an ABAP stack if they form a dual-stack system.

● Consists of exactly three alphanumeric characters● Contains only uppercase letters● Has a letter for the first character

● Does not include any of the reserved IDs listed in SAP Note 1979280 .● If you want to install a dialog instance, make sure that no Gateway instance with the

same SAP system ID (SAPSID) exists in your SAP system landscape.

SAP System Instance Numbers

Technical identifier for internal processes. It consists of a two-digit number from 00 to 97.

The instance number must be unique on a host. That is, if more than one SAP instance is run­ning on the same host, these instances must be assigned different numbers.

If you do not enter a specific value, the instance number is set automatically to the next free and valid instance number that has not yet been assigned to the SAP system to be installed or to SAP systems that already exist on the installation host.

For more information about the naming of SAP system instances, see SAP Directories [page 53].

SAP System Profile Direc­tory

/<sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/profile or /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/profile

The installer retrieves parameters from the SAP system profile directory of an existing SAP system.

SAP profiles are operating system files that contain instance configuration information.

The installer prompts you to enter the location of the profile directory when the installation option that you execute is not the first one belonging to your SAP system installation, for ex­ample if you are installing a distributed system or a dialog instance to an existing SAP system. See also the description of the parameters SAP System ID and Database ID.

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/profile is the soft link referring to /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/profile.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 37

Page 38: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameter Definition

Master Password Common password for all users created during the installation:

Basic Password policy

The master password must meet the following requirements:

● It must be 8 to 14 characters long● It must contain at least one letter (a-z, A-Z)● It must contain at least one digit (0-9)● It must not contain \ (backslash) or " (double quote).

CautionThe SAP installer uses a password length from 8 to 14 characters by default. When you limit the password length on your IBM i host, for example by the system values QSECURITY,QPWDLVL, or QPWDMAXLEN this can influence the maximum length of the SAP passwords. If you set QPWDMAXLEN to 10, then only a password length from 8 to 10 charac­ters can be used. The recommended security level of 30 (set by system value QSECURITY) enables a maximum password length of 128 on the IBM i host. For more information, seeChecking and Adjusting Operating System Values [page 63] .

Depending on the installation option, additional restrictions may apply.

ExampleThe master password must not contain the name of a Java user created during the instal­lation).

Key Phrase for Secure Store Settings

This is a random word or phrase that is used to encrypt the secure store.

The J2EE engine uses this phrase to generate the key that is used to encrypt the data.

The uniqueness of the phrase you use contributes to the uniqueness of the resulting key.

RecommendationUse a long key phrase that cannot be guessed easily. Use both uppercase and lowercase letters in the phrase and include special characters.

NoteIf you choose Typical mode, the installer sets the master password for the key phrase. In this case, make sure that you replace the master password with the required unique key phrase either on the Parameter Summary screen or after the installation has finished.

38 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 39: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameter Definition

DNS Domain Name for SAP System

If you want to use HTTP-based URL frameworks such as Web Dynpro applications, you have to specify the DNS domain name for the SAP system.

The DNS Domain Name is used to calculate the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), which is configured in profile parameter SAPLOCALHOSTFULL. FQDN is the fully qualified domain name for an IP address. It consists of the host name and the domain name:

<Host_Name>.<Domain_Name>

The DNS Domain Name is needed to define the URLs for the ABAP and Java application serv­ers. It is appended to the server name to calculate the FQDN.

ExampleIf your application server host is called kirk.wdf.sap.com, the DNS Domain Name is wdf.sap.com.

Path to SAPCRYPTO.SAR The SAP Cryptographic Library is required to enable Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption of HTTP connections. In most cases it is installed automatically from the kernel medium. In case it is not installed automatically and you are prompted for it during the installation, you can download it as described in SAP Note 455033 .

For more information about SAP Cryptographic Library on IBM i, see SAP Note 758667 .

This software product is subject to export control regulations in Germany as the country of origin and import regulations of your own country. SAP may not yet have a corresponding ex­port license for your user or company. Contact the contract department in your local SAP company. To download the SAP Cryptographic Software from the SAP Service Marketplace, you need a customer user ID. Before any transfer of these software products to persons, com­panies or other organizations outside your company, in particular in the case of any re-export of the software products, authorization is required from the German export control authori­ties. This might also be required from your responsible national export control authorities. This also applies to transfers to affiliated companies. Corresponding laws and regulations in the recipient country may also exist which restrict the import or the use of these software products.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 39

Page 40: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Ports

Parameter Description

ABAP Message Server Port CautionThe message server port number must be unique on the host where the message server for the SAP system is running. If there are several message servers running on one host, the message server ports must all be unique.

If you do not specify a value, the default port number is used.

ABAP Message Server Port

There is an external message server port and an internal message server port.

The ABAP message server uses both the internal and the external message server ports. The default profile contains the configuration for both message server ports.

The external message server port uses the parameter rdisp/msserv with default value 36<Instance_Number_Of_ABAP_Message_Server_Instance>.

The internal message server port uses the parameter rdisp/msserv_internal with de­fault value 39<Instance_Number_Of_ABAP_Message_Server_Instance>.

Java Message Server Port CautionThe message server port number must be unique on the host where the message server for the SAP system is running. If there are several message servers running on one host, the message server ports must all be unique.

The Java message server only uses the internal message server port. The SCS instance profile contains the configuration for the Java message server.

The parameter rdisp/msserv is set to 0, so that the external port is not open.

The internal message server port uses the parameter rdisp/msserv_internal with de­fault value 39<Instance_Number_Of_SCS_Message_Server_Instance>.

For more information about the parameters used for message server ports, see SAP Note 821875 .

40 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 41: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Operating System Users

Parameter Definition

System Administrator User The installer creates the user <SAPSID>ADM. The user SAP<SAPSID>DB is cre­ated for the J2EE database.

The sapinst_instdir directory belongs to a group named SAPINST. If this group is not available, it is created automatically as a local group. For security reasons, we recommend removing the SAPINST group from the operating sys­tem users after the execution of the installer has completed.

During the Define Parameters phase of the installer, you can specify that the group SAPINST is to be removed automatically from the operating system users after the execution of the installer has completed.

For more information about the SAPINST group, see Preparing an IBM i User Pro­file [page 78].

For more information about the sapinst_instdir directory, see Useful Infor­mation About the Installer [page 102].

Operating System Users and Groups User ID (UID) and Group ID (GID) for the OS user:

Make sure that the ID is unique and the same on each instance host.

For more information about changing UIDs or GIDs on the IBM i host, see SAP Note 818091 .

User Management Engine Parameters

Parameter Definition

Java Administrator User and Password This user has administrative permissions for user manage­ment.

After the installation, this user is available both in the ABAP and in the Java system

The installer sets the user name J2EE_ADMIN and the mas­ter password by default.

For more information about supported UME data sources and change options, see SAP Note 718383 .

Java Guest User and Password This user is used for anonymous access.

After the installation, it is available both in the ABAP and in the Java system

The installer sets the user name J2EE_GUEST and the mas­ter password by default.

For more information about supported UME data sources and change options, see SAP Note 718383 .

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 41

Page 42: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameter Definition

Communication User and Password This user is used for the communication between the ABAP system and the Java system.

After the installation, it is available both in the ABAP and in the Java system

The installer sets the user name SAPJSF and the master password by default.

For more information about supported UME data sources and change options, see SAP Note 718383 .

SDM Password This user is used for the Software Deployment Manager (SDM).

The installer sets the master password by default.

System Landscape Directory

Parameter Definition

SLD Destination The System Landscape Directory (SLD) is designed for registering the systems (along with the installed software) of your whole system landscape. The usual case is to config-ure one SLD for your complete system landscape.

You can choose between the following options:

● Register in existing central SLDChoose this option to register the SAP system you are installing in an existing SAP System Landscape Directory (SLD) by specifying the SLD connection parameters listed below in this table.

● Configure a local SLDChoose this option if you want to have a local SLD on the SAP Java system that you are installing. Then the SAP system you are installing is the SLD server.

NoteThe usual case is to configure one central SLD for your whole system landscape outside the SAP Solution Manager. However, we strongly recommend that you check the Master Guide for recommendations about which option to choose.

Register in existing central SLD

SLD HTTP Host The host name of the existing central SLD.

42 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 43: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameter Definition

SLD HTTP Port HTTP port of the SAP system based on AS Java on which the System Landscape Direc­tory (SLD) resides. The following naming convention applies: 5<Central_Instance_Number>00.

ExampleIf the central instance number of the AS Java on which the System Landscape Direc­tory (SLD) resides is 01, the SLD HTTP Port is 50100.

SLD Data Supplier User and password

The existing SLD Data Supplier user and password of the existing central SLD

SLD ABAP API User and pass­word

The existing SLD ABAP API user and password of the existing central SLD

SLD Gateway Host Specify the name of the Gateway host of the existing central SLD

SLD Gateway Instance Number Specify the instance number of the Gateway instance of the existing central SLD

Configure a local SLD

SLD Data Supplier User and password

Specify the name of the SLD Data Supplier user to be created. This user is used to send the self-registration data of your system to the SLD.

RecommendationWe recommend that you name this user SLDDSUSER

SLD ABAP API User and pass­word

Specify the name of the SLD ABAP API user to be created. This user is used to send landscape data to and from the SLD.

RecommendationWe recommend that you name this user SLDAPIUSER

Object Server Name The Object Server Name together with the CIM namespace identifies the absolute loca­tion of your System Landscape Directory. If you do not have a prefix reserved on SAP Market Place for Object Server Name, or if you just want to install a test or development system, enter the central instance host of your system. For more information about the Object Server Name parameter, see SAP Note 935245 .

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 43

Page 44: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Process Integration Parameters

Parameter Definition

Integration Repository Service User and Password

The installer sets the user name PIREPUSER and the master password by default.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

Integration Directory Service User and Password

The installer sets the user name PIDIRUSER and the master password by default.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

Landscape Directory Service User and Pass­word

The installer sets the user name PILDUSER and the master password by de­fault.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

Integration Server Application User and Password

The installer sets the user name PIAPPLUSER and the master password by default.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

44 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 45: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameter Definition

Runtime Workbench Service User and Pass­word

The installer sets the user name PIRWBUSER and the master password by default.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

Adapter Framework Server Service User and Password

The installer sets the user name PIAFUSER and the master password by de­fault.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

Integration Server Service User and Pass­word

The installer sets the user name PIISUSER and the master password by de­fault.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

Management Server Service User and Pass­word

The installer sets the user name PILSADMIN and the master password by default.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 45

Page 46: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameter Definition

Exchange Infrastructure Administrator and Password

This user has extensive authorizations.

The installer sets the user name PISUPER and the master password by de­fault.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

Exchange Infrastructure Communicator and Password

The installer sets the user name PI_JCD_RFC and the master password by default.

If required, you can choose another user name and password according to your requirements.

NoteIf you want to choose another user name, make sure that this user name starts with “PI”.

3.5.2 SAP System Database Parameters

Parameters Description

Database ID <DBSID> The <DBSID> identifies the database instance. The installer prompts you for the <DBSID> when you are installing the database instance.

For IBM i, the <DBSID> is always the same as the <SAPSID>.

● If you want to install a new database, make sure that your data­base ID:○ Is unique throughout your organization○ Consists of exactly three alphanumeric characters○ Contains only uppercase letters○ Has a letter for the first character○ Does not include any of the reserved IDs listed in SAP Note

1979280 .

Database schema The database schema name is SAP<SAPSID>DB for Java systems.

46 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 47: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameters Description

JDBC Driver Enter the JDBC driver that the AS Java should use. For more informa­tion, see Installing a JDBC Toolbox Driver [page 59].

Location of the Toolbox JDBC Driver Enter the path where the Toolbox JDBC driver files are located.

Make sure that the correct version of the JDBC driver is used.

For more information, see Hardware and Software Requirements [page 27].

ASP of SAP<SAPSID>DB and SAP<SAPSID>JRN Auxiliary Storage Pool (ASP) for the Java Database Library SAP<SAPSID>DB and the Java Journal Receiver Library SAP<SAPSID>JRN. For more information, see Distribution of Libraries on ASPs [page 68].

ASP of R3<SAPSID>DATA and R3<SAPSID>JRN Auxiliary Storage Pool (ASP) for the ABAP Database Library R3<SAPSID>DATA and the ABAP Journal Receiver Library R3<SAPSID>JRN. For more information, see Distribution of Libraries on ASPs [page 68].

ASP of SAP<SAPSID>IND Auxiliary Storage Pool (ASP) for the kernel library SAPSIDIND. For more information, see Distribution of Libraries on ASPs [page 68].

3.5.3 Additional Parameters for an SAP Web Dispatcher Installation Integrated in the ASCS Instance (Optional)

You only need to specify the following parameters during the ASCS instance installation if you perform an integrated installation of a SAP Web Dispatcher instance.

NoteYou must choose Custom parameter mode. Otherwise, you are not prompted for the SAP Web Dispatcher installation parameters during the Define Parameters phase.

Parameters Description

Message Server Host The name of the host on which the message server is located (profile parameter rdisp/mshost)

Message Server HTTP Port HTTP port of the message server (profile parameter ms/server_port_<xx>)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 47

Page 48: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Parameters Description

Password for the Internet Communica­tion Management (ICM) user

In order to use the web administration interface for the Internet Communication Manager (ICM) and SAP Web Dispatcher, an administration user webadm is cre­ated by the installer.

You have to assign a password for this user.

Related Information

ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20]

3.6 SAP System Transport Host

The transport host contains the transport directory used by the SAP transport system to store transport data and change SAP system information, such as software programs, write dictionary data, or customizing data. If you have several SAP systems it depends on your security requirements whether you want them to share a transport directory or whether you use separate directories.

When you install an SAP system, you have to decide which transport host and directory you want to use for your SAP system:

● Use the transport directory that the installer creates during the installation of the SAP system by default on the global host in /usr/sap/trans.

● Use a transport directory located on a host other than the global host (default host):○ You can use an existing transport directory and host in your SAP system landscape.○ You can set up a new transport directory on a different host.

In either case, you must prepare this host for use by the new SAP system. For more information, see Setting Up the Transport Directory [page 120].

More Information

● Setting Up File Systems [page 53]● See the SAP Library:

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Application Help Key Areas of SAP NetWeaver Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System Change and Transport System – Overview Basics of the Change and Transport System Transport Management System – Concept

48 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 49: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

3.7 Planning the Switchover Cluster for High Availability

You can reduce unplanned downtime for your high-availability (HA) SAP system by setting up a switchover cluster. This setup replicates critical software units – known as “single points of failure” (SPOFs) – across multiple host machines in the cluster. In the event of a failure on the primary node, proprietary switchover software automatically switches the failed software unit to another hardware node in the cluster. Manual intervention is not required. Applications trying to access the failed software unit experience a short delay but can then resume processing as normal.

Switchover clusters also have the advantage that you can deliberately initiate switchover to release a particular node for planned system maintenance. Switchover solutions can protect against hardware failure and operating system failure but not against human error, such as operator errors or faulty application software.

Without a switchover cluster, the SAP system SPOFs – central services instance, the database instance, and the central file share – are vulnerable to failure because they cannot be replicated. All of these can only exist once in a normal SAP system.

You can protect software units that are not SPOFs against failure by making them redundant, which means simply installing multiple instances. For example, you can add additional dialog instances. This complements the switchover solution and is an essential part of building HA into your SAP system.

RecommendationWe recommend switchover clusters to ensure HA for your SAP system.

A switchover cluster consists of:

● A hardware cluster of two or more physically separate host machines to run multiple copies of the critical software units, in an SAP system the SPOFs referred to above

● Switchover software to detect failure in a node and switch the affected software unit to the standby node, where it can continue operating

● A mechanism to enable application software to seamlessly continue working with the switched software unit – normally this is achieved by virtual addressing (although identity switchover is also possible)

Prerequisites

You must first discuss switchover clusters with your hardware partner because this is a complex technical area. In particular, you must choose a proprietary switchover product that works with your operating system.

We recommend that you read the following documentation before you start:

● Check the information and the installation guides available at:https://wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/display/SI/SAP+High+Availability

● The enqueue replication server (ERS) is essential for a high-availability system. You need one ERS for the SCS and one ERS for the ASCS installed in your system.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 49

Page 50: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Features

The following graphic shows the essential features of a switchover setup:

Switchover Setup

NoteThis figure and the figures in this section are only examples. Only the instances relevant to the switchover are shown – for example, the primary application server instance is not shown.

These graphics summarize the overall setup and do not show the exact constellation for an installation based on one of the available technologies (ABAP, dual-stack, or Java).

You need to discuss your individual HA setup with your HA partner.

50 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Planning

Page 51: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The following graphic shows an example of a switchover cluster in more detail:

Switchover Cluster

Constraints

This documentation concentrates on the switchover solution for the central services instance. For more information about how to protect the NFS file system and the database instance by using switchover software or (for the database) replicated database servers, contact your HA partner.

Make sure that your hardware is powerful enough to handle the increased workload after a switchover. Some reduction in performance might be acceptable after an emergency. However, it is not acceptable if the system comes to a standstill because it is overloaded after switchover.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPlanning P U B L I C 51

Page 52: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

4 Preparation

4.1 Preparation Checklist

This section includes the preparation steps that you have to perform for the following installation options:

● Central, distributed, or high-availability system● Dialog instance

Detailed information about the steps are available in the linked sections.

Central, Distributed, or High-Availability System

NoteIn a central system, all mandatory instances are installed on one host. Therefore, if you are installing a central system, you can ignore references to other hosts.

You can install optional standalone units J2EE Adapter Engine, Partner Connectivity Kit, Application Sharing Server only as a central system.

1. You set up file systems [page 53] and make sure that the required disk space is available for the directories to be created during the installation.

2. If required, you set up virtual host names [page 58].3. If you want to install a high-availability system, you perform switchover preparations [page 58].4. You complete the preparation for IBM i [page 59].5. If you want to share the transport directory [page 120] trans from another system, make this directory

available to your installation hosts.6. You install the SAP frontend software [page 80] on the desktop of the end user.7. You check that the required installation media [page 80] are available on each host.8. You copy the installation media manually to your IBM i [page 87].9. Continue with Installation [page 90].

Dialog Instance

You have to perform the following preparations on the host where you install the dialog instance:

1. You set up file systems [page 53] and make sure that the required disk space is available for the directories to be created during the installation.

52 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 53: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

2. If you want to use virtual host names, you have to set the environment variable SAPINST_USE_HOSTNAME [page 58] for the installation user using the following command:ADDENVVAR ENVVAR(SAPINST_USE_HOSTNAME) VALUE('<Virtual_Host_Name>') REPLACE(*YES)Alternatively, you can specify the virtual host name in the command to run the installer [page 98].

3. You complete the preparation for IBM i [page 59].4. If you want to share the transport directory [page 120] trans from another system, make this directory

available to your installation hosts.5. You check that the required installation media [page 80] are available on the dialog instance host.6. You copy the installation media manually to your IBM i [page 87].7. If you upgraded the SAP system to which you want to install a new dialog instance, you might have to

update instance profiles of the existing system [page 148].8. Continue with Installation [page 90].

4.2 Required File Systems and Directories

The following sections describe the directories that are required for the instances of an SAP system, how to set up file systems and – if required – raw devices on operating system level:

● SAP Directories [page 53]

4.2.1 SAP Directories

Depending on the installation option you have chosen, the installer automatically creates the directories listed in the following figures and tables.

Before running the installation, you have to set up the required file systems manually. In addition, you have to make sure that the required disk space for the directories to be installed is available on the relevant hard disks.

The figure below assumes that you have set up one file system for the SAP system mount directory <sapmnt> and one file system for the /usr/sap directory. However, you have to decide for which directories you want to set up separate file systems. If you do not set up any file system on your installation host, the installer creates all directories in the root directory ( / ).

On IBM i, the directory /sapmnt is used as the SAP system mount directory <sapmnt> .

The following types of directories are created automatically:

● Physically shared directories● Logically shared directories● Local directories

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 53

Page 54: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The following figure shows the directory structure of the SAP system:

Directory Structure for an ABAP+Java System

Both the ABAP stack and the Java stack of every new installation of an ABAP+Java system are Unicode.

Physically Shared Directories

Physically shared directories reside on the SAP global host and are shared by QFileSvr.400. The installer creates the following directories:

● The directory /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID> , which contains SAP kernel and related files, is created on the first installation host. The first installation host is usually the host where the central services instance is to run, but you can also choose another host for /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID> .You need to manually share this directory with QFileSvr.400 and – for a distributed system – link it from the other installation hosts.The installer creates the following shared subdirectories in /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID> during the SAP system installation:○ global

Contains globally shared data○ profile

Contains the profiles of all instances

54 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 55: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

○ exeContains executable kernel programs

For Java:○ jdbc

Contains the JDBC driver to connect to the Java database on IBM i○ j2ee (deprecated)

● The directory /usr/sap/trans, which is the global transport directory.If you want to use an existing transport directory, you have to make it available with QFileSvr.400 before you install the relevant application server instance. Otherwise, the installer creates /usr/sap/trans locally.For more information about the global transport directory, see Setting Up the Transport Directory [page 120].

Physically Shared SAP Directories

Directory Description Required Minimum Disk Space

<sapmnt>/<SAPSID> SAP system directory Minimum 2 GB

/usr/sap/trans SAP transport directory This value heavily depends on the use of your SAP system.

For production systems, we recommend to use as much free space as available (at least 2 GB), because the space require­ment normally grows dynamically.

For the installation, it is sufficient to use 2 GB for each SAP system instance. You can enlarge the file system afterwards.

Logically Shared Directories

Logically shared directories reside on the local hosts with symbolic links to the physically shared directories that reside on the SAP global host. The installer creates the directory /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS on each host. The subdirectories contain symbolic links to the corresponding subdirectories of /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID> on the first installation host, as shown in the figure above.

The installer uses sapcpe to replicate the kernel automatically from /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/exe/run (DIR_CT_RUN) to /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/<Instance_Name>/exe (DIR_EXECUTABLE parameter in the STARTe profile) for each SAP system instance, where <Instance_Name> is either DVEBMGS<Instance_Number> (central instance) or D<Instance_Number> (dialog instance).

Whenever a local instance is started, the sapcpe program checks the executables against those in the logically shared directories and, if necessary, replicates them to the local instance.

The following entry in the start profile is responsible for this:

Execute_00 = immediate $(DIR_CT_RUN)/sapcpe$(FT_EXE) pf=$(_PF)

where $(_PF) points to the instance profile.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 55

Page 56: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Local Directories (SAP System)

The installer also creates local directories that reside on the local hosts. The directory /usr/sap/<SAPSID> contains files for the operation of a local instance as well as symbolic links to the data for one system. This directory is physically located on each host in the SAP system and contains the following subdirectories:

● SYS

NoteThe subdirectories of /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS have symbolic links to the corresponding subdirectories of /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID> , as shown in the figure above.

● Instance-specific directories with the following names:○ The directory of the central instance is called DVEBMGS<Instance_Number> .

The SDM subfolder contains the Software Deployment Manager (SDM). The SDM is only available on the central instance. It is a tool with which you can manage and deploy software packages (Software Deployment Archives and Software Component Archives) that you receive from SAP.

○ The directory of a dialog instance is called D<Instance_Number> .● The directory of the central services instance (SCS instance) is called SCS<Instance_Number> .● The directory of the ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance) is called

ASCS<Instance_Number> .● The directory of an enqueue replication server instance (ERS instance) is called ERS<Instance_Number>

(high availability only).One enqueue replication server instance can be installed for the SCS instance, and one for the ASCS instance. If you install a high-availability system, you must install an ERS instance both for the ASCS instance and for the SCS instance.

Local SAP Directories

Directory Description Required Minimum Disk Space

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>

Central instance directory 4 GB

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/D<Instance_Number> Dialog instance directory 4 GB

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/ASCS<Instance_Number> ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance) directory

2 GB

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/ERS<Instance_Number> Enqueue replication server in­stance (ERS instance) directory for the ASCS (high availability only)

2 GB

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SCS<Instance_Number> Central services instance (SCS in­stance) directory

2 GB

56 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 57: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Directory Description Required Minimum Disk Space

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/ERS<Instance_Number> Enqueue replication server in­stance (ERS) directory for the SCS (high availability only)

2 GB

Directories of the SAP Host Agent

The SAP Host Agent has only local directories as shown in the following figure:

Directory Structure for the SAP Host Agent

Local Directories (SAP Host Agent)

The SAP Host Agent directory /usr/sap/hostctrl requires 100 MB of disk space. It contains the following subdirectories:

● exe

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 57

Page 58: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Contains the profile host_profile● work

Working directory of the SAP Host Agent

4.3 Using Virtual Host Names

You can use one or more virtual TCP/IP host names for SAP servers within an SAP server landscape to hide their physical network identities from each other. This can be useful when quickly moving SAP servers or complete server landscapes to alternative hardware without having to reinstall or reconfigure.

Prerequisites

Make sure that the virtual host name can be correctly resolved in your Domain Name System (DNS) setup.

Procedure

Proceed as described in SAP Note 1624061 .

4.4 Performing Switchover Preparations for High Availability

You have to assign virtual host names to prepare the switchover for high-availability.

Context

To be able to use the required virtual host names [page 58], you have to set the installer property SAPINST_USE_HOSTNAME to specify the required virtual host name before you start the installer. Alternatively you can specify the virtual host name in the relevant field on the respective instance screen.

For more information, see SAP System Parameters [page 36].

58 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 59: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

Assign the virtual IP addresses and host names for the SCS and ASCS instance, and (if required) NFS to appropriate failover groups.

NoteFor more information on virtual addresses and virtual host names and how to assign resources to failover groups, ask your HA partner.

To enable a failover in a dual-stack system (ABAP+Java), both central services instances – SCS and ASCS – have to use the same virtual host name.

4.5 Preparation for IBM i

You have to complete the following preparations for IBM i, which are described in more detail in the linked sections:

● You install the Toolbox JDBC driver [page 59].● You check the transport directory [page 61].● You check Qp2Term, Qp2Shell, and the Portable Application Solution Environment [page 62].● You install the Qshell [page 62].● You check and adjust system values [page 63].● You adjust startup program QSTRUP [page 67].● You check distribution of libraries on ASPs [page 68].● You add a user ASP [page 69].● You configure TCP/IP [page 70].● You adjust the relational database name [page 77].● You install English as a secondary language [page 78].● You prepare an IBM i user profile [page 78].● You enable the user QSECOFR [page 79].

4.5.1 Installing the Toolbox JDBC Driver

Use

All database access from Java occurs through the JDBC API (Java Database Connectivity). Implementations of this are called Toolbox JDBC driver. The Toolbox JDBC driver typically runs on the application server. SAP certifies one JDBC driver for access to IBM i:

● IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC Driver also referred to as Toolbox JDBC driver

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 59

Page 60: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Toolbox JDBC driver is a type 4 Toolbox JDBC driver. This means that it is completely written in Java. It is therefore OS-independent. SAP certifies this driver for the following:○ Local (two-tier) access from an IBM i to an IBM i database○ Remote (three-tier) access from any platform that was certified by SAP for SAP NetWeaver to an IBM i

database

NoteIBM Developer Kit for Java JDBC driver, also referred to as the native JDBC driver is not supported for SAP NetWeaver 7.0 and higher running SAP JVM.

Prerequisites

Toolbox JDBC Driver

● Make sure that the QUSER profile is enabled. To do so, log on as user with similar permissions such as QSECOFR and enter the following command:CHGUSRPRF USRPRF(QUSER) STATUS(*ENABLED)

● You need to start the distributed data management (DDM) TCP/IP server and host servers after each initial program load (IPL). To do so, proceed as follows:○ To start the DDM TCP/IP server, enter the following command:

STRTCPSVR SERVER(*DDM)○ To start host servers, enter the following command:

STRHOSTSVR SERVER(*ALL)

RecommendationYou must start server jobs automatically after each IPL. For more information, see Adjusting Startup Program QSTRUP [page 67].

Procedure

NoteYou must follow the patch strategy described in the respective IBM Information APAR (IBM i 5.4 or higher) to obtain the current correction level of the supported IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC driver.

Since you use the Toolbox JDBC driver that is not supplied by a PTF but that has to be downloaded from an IBM webpage, we recommend that you do not overwrite the Toolbox product. Instead, proceed as follows:

1. Log on to your database instance host with your installation user.2. Follow the download instructions in the respective Information APAR.3. Extract the patch into an arbitrary directory on your database instance host, for example:

/sapmnt/jdbc/toolbox/jt400.jar

60 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 61: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

NoteThere are currently three versions of the Toolbox JDBC driver: 3.0, 4.0, and 4.2. Make sure you downloaded version 3.0 and not version 4.0 or 4.2. If you have the wrong version, the installer will detect this and it will ask you again for the Toolbox JDBC driver location. The installer will do this until you put in the right version. Afterwards, the installation will continue. For more information, see SAP Note 1232613

.

4. During the installation process, choose Toolbox JDBC driver and specify the directory you have chosen above. In the above example, this is the following directory:/sapmnt/jdbc/toolbox

NoteThe installation process copies the Toolbox JDBC driver into the directory /usr/sap/<SID>/SYS/jdbc/tbx. You have to maintain this Toolbox JDBC driver for your SAP system in this directory. If you have several SAP systems using the Toolbox JDBC driver you have to maintain the driver individually for every SAP system.

4.5.2 Checking the Transport Directory

Use

You need to check the location of the transport directory for your SAP system.

Prerequisites

The transport directory /usr/sap/trans only exists on your IBM i after you successfully finished an SAP system installation. If there is already a directory /usr/sap/trans, this directory should be linked to the local directory /sapmnt/trans. However, if this link points to a remote IBM i using QFileSvr.400 (/QFileSvr.400/<SAPTRANSHOST>/sapmnt/trans), you have to create the missing users on the remote host.

Procedure

If there is a link /usr/sap/trans on your IBM i that points to a remote host, you must create the following users on this remote host before starting the installation:

● Installation user● <SAPSID>ADM

NoteWhen using QFileSvr.400, the passwords must be the same for each user on every host.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 61

Page 62: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

For more information about how to create an installation user on the remote, see Preparing an IBM i User Profile [page 78]. For more information about how to create <SAPSID> users using CRTSAPUSR, see SAP Note 1123501 .

4.5.3 Qp2Term, Qp2Shell, and the Portable Application Solution Environment

Use

The Portable Application Solution Environment delivers similar UNIX command line flexibility such as the Qshell. IBM PASE for i (PASE for i) is more than just a shell interpreter, it is an entire programming environment based on the AIX Application Binary Interface.

The Qp2Term program runs an interactive terminal application on the IBM i, similar to the Qshell command line.

The Qp2Shell programs allow you to execute a shell script or a PASE for i application. Qshell accomplishes these features by a command wrapper that either starts the Qshell command line, or executes scripts non interactively.

You call the Qp2Term and Qp2Shell programs using command CALL mechanism.

RecommendationWe recommend that you use Qp2Term instead of QShell.

Procedure

If not already installed, install option 33 of the license program 57nnSS1, the Portable Application Solution Environment. For more information about Qp2Term, Qp2Shell and installing PASE for i, see the documentation in the IBM Knowledge Center.

4.5.4 Installing the Qshell

Use

You must install the Qshell on your IBM i. This gives you greater flexibility in dealing with stream files because you can use a large set of utilities that are common on UNIX systems, for example, grep, tail, or ls.

In addition, Qshell is compatible with ksh scripts in UNIX.

62 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 63: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

Install option 30 of the Qshell (license program 57nnSS1).

NoteFor more information about Qshell, see the IBM documentation.

4.5.5 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values

Use

To allow the SAP system to run optimally on IBM i, you must adjust a number of operating system values.

Prerequisites

● You have entered the following command to switch on work control block compression:CHGIPLA CPRJOBTBL(*ALL)This allows work control block space to be reused.

● The recommendations given below for system values QACTJOB, QTOTJOB, QADLACTJ, and QADLTOTJ assume that only the SAP system is running on the IBM i. If you are also running other applications, you might need to preallocate more jobs. The values QACTJOB and QTOTJOB are used for initial space allocation at initial program load (IPL), time for the number of active jobs and the total number of jobs that are in the system at any one time. If the allocated number of active or total jobs is reached, the system values QADLACTJ and QADLTOTJ determine how many additional jobs are to have space allocated. Check and adapt your TCP/IP configuration on IBM i. For more information, see SAP Note 92589 .

CautionDo not forget to perform an IPL after any change. Otherwise, your changes may not work.

● You have applied all installed program temporary fixes (PTFs) on your IBM i. To check this, enter the following command:DSPPTFPTFs with the state Permanently applied, Temporarily applied or Superseded are integrated in the system or are superseded by a newer PTF. PTFs with another state such as Not applied, Save file only, Damaged or Cover letter only are not currently active.

RecommendationWe recommend that you install all required PTFs. They should be applied and active.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 63

Page 64: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

● To display all system values, enter the following command:WRKSYSVAL SYSVAL(*ALL) OUTPUT(*PRINT)

● To display or change individual system values, enter the following command:WRKSYSVAL SYSVAL(<system_value_name>)and enter option 5 (Display) or option 2 (Change).After changing a system value, enter option 5 (Display) to check your changes.

NoteTo avoid having to run an IPL several times, we recommend that you delay the IPL until you have made all the necessary changes to the system values and, if necessary, have added a user ASP [page 69].

Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values

System Value Recommended Value Description

QMCHPOOL 10–15% of the entire main storage is assigned to the machine pool

The fault rate in the *MACHINE pool should be as low as possi­

ble, usually, lower than 5 (see SAP Note 49201 ); otherwise, the pool must be increased. A change to this system value takes effect immediately.

QACTJOB 1000 Set system value QACTJOB to a value close to the number of jobs on your system. To find out the number of jobs, enter the command WRKACTJOB. For a two-tier system, this is about 1000.

QTOTJOB 2000 Set system value QTOTJOB to 2000. When you have worked with the SAP system for a while, adjust this value to the value you usually see for the command WRKSYSSTS in the field Jobs in system.

QADLACTJ

and

QADLTOTJ

500

1000

Set system value QADLACTJ to 500 and system value QADLTOTJ to 1000.

QSECURITY 30 or 40 System value QSECURITY controls the level of security en­forced on your system. Set QSECURITY to at least 30 to en­sure object security for the SAP objects to be installed.

Security levels 10 and 20 are theoretically possible. However, we do not recommend that you use either of these values. Se­curity level 10 provides neither password nor object protection. Security level 20 provides no object protection.

To activate this system value, you must perform an initial pro­gram load (IPL).

64 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 65: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

System Value Recommended Value Description

QCTLSBSD QCTL When you start your IBM i, the program specified in system value QSTRUPPGM is called. This startup program is responsible for starting the subsystems. When this startup program runs, system value QCTLSBSD is queried. The specifications made for this value determine whether subsystem QBASE or subsys­tems QCTL, QINTER,QBATCH,QSPL,QCMN, and QSERVER are started.

Two settings are possible for system value QCTLSBSD (control­ling subsystem):

● QBASEThe controlling subsystem is QBASE. Subsystem QBASE is started.

● QCTLThe controlling subsystem is QCTL. Subsystems QCTL,QINTER,QBATCH,QSPL,QCMN,QSERVER are started. Your change is activated the next time the IBM i is started. To activate the subsystems, you have to restart the IBM i.

QDATE Check the system date and adjust it if necessary. (The date format is determined by system value QDATFMT.)

QTIME Check the system time and adjust it if necessary.

QJOBMSGQFL *WRAP or *PRTWRAP System value QJOBMSGQFL allows you to specify how you would like the job message queue to be handled if it overflows. The default value is *NOWRAP. If this value is set, the IBM i sends a message when the queue is full and ends the job that is currently running. When an SAP system is installed, a large amount of information is sent to the job message queue. For this reason, system value QJOBMSGQFL is automatically changed to *WRAP during installation. If the queue becomes full, the oldest entries are deleted and the current job is not in­terrupted. Once the installation is complete, the system value is automatically returned to its original value.

QPFRADJ 0 If you have adjusted the size of the IBM i pools as described in SAP Note 49201 , you have to set the system value QPFRADJ to 0. This deactivates automatic performance ad­justment and prevents your settings from being lost after an IPL.

QSTRUPPGM To cause your adjusted startup program to be started after an IPL, change Startup program to QSTRUP and Library to QGPL.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 65

Page 66: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

System Value Recommended Value Description

QAUTOCFG 1 To allow device descriptions to be configured automatically, set system value QAUTOCFG to 1.

QBASACTLVL When installing an SAP sys­tem, the value needs to be in­creased. Use the following formulas to calculate the in­crease:

ABAP

Database server:

(number of SAP work proc­esses on database server + number of SAP work proc­esses on each remote appli­cation server) * 1.20

Application server:

(number of SAP work proc­esses on application server) * 1.20

Database server and appli­cation server:

(number of SAP work proc­esses) * 1.20

Java

Java server:

(number of servers) * 700

ABAP + Java:

Add the values calculated for ABAP and Java

QBASACTLVL is the activity level of the base storage pool. This value indicates how many system and user threads can com­pete at the same time for storage in the base storage pool. This pool is specified in the subsystem descriptions as *BASE. QBASACTLVL depends on the types of jobs run in this storage pool. The lower limit for QBASACTLVL is 1.

Note: This value does not affect only SAP work processes but also processes and threads that belong to other applications running on your system.

Since the Java processes contains more than 100 threads, we strongly recommend that you adjust the Max Act (Maximum Active) value of the memory pool your Java processes are run­ning in. To do this, enter command WRKSYSSTS and edit the parameter Max Act or enter command WRKSYSVAL with Op­tion 2 to change system value QBASACTLVL. The change be­comes active immediately. As a rule of thumb, you have to add to your current Max Act value a number of 700 for each Java server process you start on your IBM i.

ExampleWhen you install one Java only system on your IBM i, this system has at the beginning only one Java server (called server0). At that point you have to add 700 to your current Max Act value. When you later reconfigure your Java only system to have two Java server running in parallel (server0 and server1) you have to add once again 700 to your cur­rent Max Act value. Finally in total you have added 1400 to Max Act value.

NoteIn the past the Max Act value had an influence on the data­base optimizer, but this has changed.

CautionYou should not set the system variable QIBM_PASE_CCSID. Do not leave this variable empty. Make sure that QIBM_PASE_CCSID is deleted at least for the time while you are installing your SAP system using the following command:

RMVENVVAR ENVVAR(QIBM_PASE_CCSID) LEVEL(*SYS)

66 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 67: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Changing TCP buffer size:

1. To change the following values, enter the following command:CHGTCPA TCPRCVBUF(1048576) TCPSNDBUF(1048576)

2. To activate the changes, restart TCP/IP by entering the following commands:ENDTCPSTRTCPor perform an IPL.

For more information, see SAP Note 484548 and 92589 .

Changing Expert Cache

Activate the expert cache for the storage pool in which the subsystem of the SAP system runs. Usually, this is the*BASE pool.

To activate the expert cache, enter the following command:

WRKSYSSTS

This will display the storage pools. Now change the default value in the column for the paging option from *FIXED to *CALC. The paging option defines whether the system is to dynamically adjust the paging characteristics of the storage pool to achieve optimum performance in each case. *CALC can be used to improve the performance of the database read accesses and the database write accesses so that larger blocks can be read to the main storage and the changed data does not have to be removed from the main storage.

Result

You have made the necessary adjustments to IBM i values to enable the SAP system to run correctly on IBM i.

NoteWhen a new SAP system is created a special entry is made automatically in the System Reply List. These entries make sure that changes of tables attributes work without problems. Do not change or delete this entry after the installation!

System Reply List Entries

Sequence Reply List Entries Message ID Reply

3201 CPA32B2 I

4.5.6 Adjusting Startup Program QSTRUP

Use

When you use the operating system IBM i to start a partition or a server, the system automatically executes a startup program that is used to start services, servers, and subsystems. The customers can change the startup program that is delivered with the operating system.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 67

Page 68: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

RecommendationWe highly recommend to start the services, servers and subsystems in the order shown below.

Procedure

To ensure that SAP Host Agent and SAP systems can start and work correctly, the following functions must be executed by the startup program:

1. Automatic start of TCP/IP2. Automatic start of the host servers3. Start of the EDRSQL server4. Only for Java systems: Start of the DDM-TCP/IP server5. Automatic creation of directory entries under /QFileSvr.4006. Start of the subsystem QUSRWRK

For more information about how to setup the startup program for SAP, see SAP Note 1703667 .

4.5.7 Distribution of Libraries on ASPs

Disk units that are attached to an IBM i server are combined into one or multiple auxiliary storage pools (ASPs). You always have an ASP 1, also known as system ASP. Optionally, you can configure one or multiple additional ASPs. These are called user ASPs.

Before you run installer to install your SAP system, you must decide on the following:

● Which ASP you want to use to install new libraries for ABAP● How you want to distribute the libraries that hold the SAP system data on ASPs

For a production system, we recommend that you use two different ASPs for the database library and database journal receiver library. Make sure that the database library and the database journal receiver library are located on separate physical disks and not merely on different virtual ASPs that reside on the same physical disk. This is necessary to prevent that a single hardware failure of a disk unit destroys both the database and the database journal receiver. For test and quality assurance systems, both the database and journal receiver libraries can be installed on the same ASP.

Note● The database and journal receiver libraries can be installed only in the same ASP group.● The database library can only be installed on the system ASP (1), user ASP (2-32) or on a primary

independent ASP.● The journal receiver library can be installed on a system ASP (1), user ASP (2-32) or on any independent

ASP.● If a primary independent ASP is chosen for the SAP file system, then the same independent ASP must

be used for the database library.

68 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 69: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

4.5.8 Adding a User ASP

Use

If you decide to store the database libraries and journal receiver libraries in separate auxiliary storage pools (ASPs), make sure that you follow these guidelines:

1. The disk units in the ASP that is holding the journal receiver libraries must be protected by mirrored protection or a different parity set than the disk units in the ASP that is holding the database libraries.

2. For performance reasons, the ASP that is holding the journal receiver libraries should have a minimum of three disk arms.

3. The ASP that is holding the journal receivers should be large enough to hold all journal receivers that are generated while your SAP system is running, until the receivers can be detached, saved, and deleted. If the journal receivers grow too quickly and the ASP is full, some data might overflow into the system ASP. In this state, you can no longer perform data recovery after disk failures that result in the loss of the system ASP.

Before you can specify a different ASP during the SAP installation, you must configure the ASP in IBM i and assign disk units to it. The procedure consists of two steps:

1. You check if a user ASP with sufficient space has been set up.2. You add or extend a user ASP if required.

Procedure

Checking the User ASP

1. Enter STRSST (Start System Service Tools).2. Sign on with a valid service tools user ID and password.3. Enter option 3 (Work with disk units).4. Enter option 2 (Work with disk configuration).5. Enter option 1 (Display disk configuration).6. Enter option 2 (Display disk configuration capacity).

You can see whether a user ASP exists and if it contains enough disk units. On the Display disk configuration screen, you can also use option 5 (Display device parity status) to verify that your user ASP is in a separate parity set.

NoteIn early releases of IBM i, user ASPs could only contain objects of type journal receiver or save file. The libraries to address these objects where kept in the system ASP. If an existing user ASP contains journal receivers or save files, while the library that contains these objects is in the system ASP, you cannot create additional libraries in this user ASP and the installation fails. If you have sufficient disk space, we recommend that you work around this problem by adding a second user ASP (for example, ASP 3). The alternative would be to remove the old journal receivers or save files from the user ASP, or to create the SAP journal receivers in the system ASP. For more information, see the IBM i documentation Backup and Recovery (SC41-5304).

Adding a User ASP

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 69

Page 70: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

1. Perform a manual initial program load (IPL) of your IBM i.○ Set the mode to manual on the control panel○ Enter the following command:

PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES)2. Enter option 3 (Use Dedicated Service Tools (DST)) from the menu that appears.3. Sign on by entering your DST user and password.4. Enter option 4 (Work with disk units).5. Enter option 1 (Work with disk configuration).6. Enter option 3 (Work with ASP configuration).7. Enter option 6 (Move units from one ASP to another).8. Specify the ASP to which you wish to move specific units by entering the number of the ASP next to the

relevant unit in the column New ASP.9. Choose ENTER .10. In the next screen, choose ENTER to confirm that you want to continue.

The Confirm Move of Units screen appears.11. To confirm your choices, choose ENTER .

NoteMoving units takes several minutes.

12. Continue the procedure and complete the IPL.13. Switch back to normal mode.

4.5.9 Configuring TCP/IP

Use

This section describes how to integrate IBM i into your TCP/IP network.

Prerequisites

Before configuring TCP/IP, you must do the following:

● Make sure that you have the following information:○ The interface of your IBM i to which the Local Area Network is attached○ The IP addresses of your IBM i, subnet mask, and router or Gateway○ The local domain name○ The IBM i host name

● Decide on your IBM i host name. The host name cannot be longer than eight characters although SAP allows 13 characters starting with Release 4.6 and higher.For more information, see SAP Note 611361 .

70 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 71: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

NoteThe TCP/IP configuration on IBM i is case sensitive. Do not enter your host name once in uppercase and then in lowercase characters. It is important that you enclose your host name entry in single quotation marks. Otherwise, the IBM i interprets the characters as uppercase characters.

Procedure

NoteAn IP address is a unique address in a TCP/IP network for a particular IBM i. A subnet mask is a mask used to divide a single network address into multiple logical networks.

1. To change the name of the computer, enter the command chgneta and prompt F4 .You must then enter the following information and choose ENTER :○ System name○ Local network ID○ Default local location name

The following screen appears:

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 71

Page 72: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

2. To set up the description line, enter the command WRKHDWRSC TYPE(*CMN) and proceed as follows:1. On the Work with Communication Resources screen, enter option 5 (Work with configuration

descriptions) for the Ethernet port and choose ENTER .2. On the Work with Configurations Description screen, enter option 1 (Create) to enter the description

gigaline or ethline and choose ENTER . On the following screen, enter the line speed and duplex and then press F10 and page down two screens.

On the Create Line Desc (Ethernet) (CRTLINETH) screen, make sure the autocreate controller is set to *yes.

72 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 73: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

3. To call the TCP/IP configuration menu, enter the command CFGTCP and proceed as follows:1. To work with interfaces, enter option 1 (Work with TCP/IP interfaces).

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 73

Page 74: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The following screen appears:

You need at least two entries: one for the loopback entry and one for the IP address of your IBM i.The loopback address always takes the IP address 127.0.0.1, subnet mask 255.0.0.0 and line description *LOOPBACK.To add an entry, enter option 1 (ADD) and choose ENTER .Add entries for the first three parameters and accept the default values for the other parameters.

2. To work with routes, enter option 2 (Work with TCP/IP routes).

74 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 75: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The following screen appears:

If the route to the remote host, in this case the PC workstation, is through a Gateway or if the remote host resides in a different network or subnetwork to the local host, you need to configure a route.

3. To change the domain information, enter option 12 (Change TCP/IP domain information).

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 75

Page 76: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The following screen appears:

NoteIt is important that you enclose your host name entry in single quotation marks. If you do not, the IBM i interprets the characters as uppercase characters.

If you have one or more remote name servers, you need to define the IP address here. Note that the Host name server priority must be set to *LOCAL.

Testing the TCP/IP Connection

Before proceeding with the SAP installation (that is, the installation of the executable programs), check that this TCP/IP connection has been set up correctly. To do so, enter the command ping (Network Connection) specifying your own system as Remote system. Do this twice, once specifying only <Host_Name>, and once <Host_Name>.<Domain_Name>.

ExampleIn this example it is assumed that the host name is as0008 and the domain name wdf.sap.corp. In this case, your entries would be the following:

● ping 'as0008'

● ping 'as0008.wdf.sap.corp'

76 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 77: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

After installing the SAP system kernel, check the TCP/IP connection again with the command:

WRKLNK '/QFileSvr.400/<Host_Name>'

Your host name should be displayed under Object link, for example, as0008 for the host in the example given above.

For more information about TCP/IP configuration, see the documentation in the IBM Knowledge Center.

Result

The IBM i is integrated into your TCP/IP network.

4.5.10 Adjusting the Relational Database Name

Use

You use the following procedure to adjust the local relational database name (RDB name) so it is the same as the TCP/IP host name.

Procedure

1. Log on to your database host as user QSECOFR.2. To display your TCP/IP host name, enter the following command and press F4 :

CHGTCPDMN3. Search for the contents of HOSTNAME.

This is your TCP/IP host name.4. Before you can adjust the local RDB name, you have to check if the entry remote location equals

*Local exists. To do this, enter the following command:WRKRDBDIRE

5. Depending on the outcome, proceed as follows:○ If an entry for RDB name exists and you want to adjust the name to the TCP/IP host name

<TCP_Host_Name>, enter the following command:CHGRDBDIRE RMTLOCNAME(*LOCAL *IP) PORT(*DRDA)RMTAUTMTH(*ENCRYPTED *ALWLOWER) DEV(*LOC) LCLLOCNAME(*LOC)RMTNETID(*LOC) MODE(*NETATR) TNSPGM(*DRDA)

○ If an entry for RDB name does not exist and a different entry exists with Remote Location *LOCAL you have to delete it using RMVRDBDIRE RDB(<Current_RDB_*LOCAL>). Afterwards go to the next step and add the required RDB name.

○ If an entry for RDB name does not exist, you have to add one with the correct name <TCP_Host_Name>.To do this, enter the following command:ADDRDBDIRE RDB(<TCP_Host_Name>)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 77

Page 78: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

RMTLOCNAME(*LOCAL *IP) PORT(*DRDA)RMTAUTMTH(*ENCRYPTED *ALWLOWER) DEV(*LOC) LCLLOCNAME(*LOC)RMTNETID(*LOC) MODE(*NETATR) TNSPGM(*DRDA)

6. If you are planning to use an independent ASP, make sure there is an entry for it in the RDB directory.

4.5.11 Installing English as a Secondary Language

Use

On every IBM i where English is not the primary language, you must install English as the secondary language library. This is necessary for SAP to be able to provide support.

NoteTo check if English is already installed on your IBM i as a secondary language, enter GO LICPGM on the IBM i command line and use option 20. If one of the following secondary language libraries is displayed, you have already installed English as a secondary language library: QSYS2924,QSYS2938,QSYS2959, or QSYS2984.

Procedure

1. On the command line, enter GO LICPGM2. Enter option 21 (install secondary languages).3. Enter option 1 to select any of the following libraries: QSYS2924, QSYS2938, QSYS2959, or QSYS2984.

4.5.12 Preparing an IBM i User Profile

Use

For running the installer you need to create a user account on the IBM i host.

The following requirement applies:

● SCM Only:The IBM i installation user profile must have user class *SECOFR and all special authorities that belong to user QSECOFR.

78 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 79: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

NoteThe user name SAPIUSR and the password SAP are used as examples in the procedures.

Enter the following command:

CRTUSRPRF USRPRF(SAPIUSR) PASSWORD(SAP) USRCLS(*SECOFR) TEXT('SAP installation user') SPCAUT(*USRCLS) OWNER(*USRPRF) LANGID(ENU) CNTRYID(US) CCSID(500) LOCALE(*NONE)

NoteIn previous releases, we recommended that you create the user SAPINST on IBM i to install the SAP system. In the current release, a group SAPINST is created generically on all platforms and is used for the installation of the SAP system. If the user SAPINST already exists on your system, you must delete this user. If you do not want to delete this user for any reason, you must add to the user profile SAPINST the feature of a group by adding SAPINST to the group of a different user profile such as SAPIUSR. To do this, use the following command:

CHGUSRPRF USRPRF(SAPIUSR) GRPPRF(SAPINST)

Now the user SAPINST can also be used as a group by the installer.

NoteIf you have already an old installation user and you want to make sure this user is configured correctly for your next SAP system installation, call the following command:

CHGUSRPRF USRPRF(SAPIUSR) USRCLS(*SECOFR) TEXT('SAP installation user') SPCAUT(*USRCLS) OWNER(*USRPRF) LANGID(ENU) CNTRYID(US) CCSID(500) LOCALE(*NONE)

NoteIn a distributed environment, the installation user must have the same name and password on all hosts so that the required remote access permissions are available. For example, the profile directory on the global host should be accessible to the installation user of a remote dialog instance.

4.5.13 Enable the User QSECOFR

Use

The user QSECOFR is the standard administrator user on IBM i. This user has the most authority. For running the installer on IBM i, the user QSECOFR must be enabled. Although for running the installer you only require the installation user, the SAP kernel tools on IBM i need some adopted permissions from the QSECOFR. If the user QSECOFR is disabled this will lead to errors when the SAP kernel tools are called such as CRTR3INST.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 79

Page 80: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

1. To check the status of the user profile QSECOFR use the following command as your installation user:DSPUSRPRF USRPRF(QSECOFR)

2. To enable the user QSECOFR use the following command as your installation user:CHGUSRPRF USRPRF(QSECOFR) STATUS(*ENABLED)

NoteIn a distributed environment, the installation user must have the same name and password on all hosts so that the required remote access permissions are available. For example, the profile directory on the global host should be accessible to the installation user of a remote dialog instance.

RecommendationCheck also if the password of the user QSECOFR is expired. To do this, login as QSECOFR. When the password is already expired you will be asked for a new password. Set a new password and the password of QSECOFR is then no longer expired.

Only when the password of the QSECOFR is not expired the installation procedure will finish successfully.

4.6 Installing the SAP Front-End Software

Before you start the installation, make sure that the SAP front-end software is installed on at least one computer in your system environment to be able to log on to the SAP system after the installation has finished.

Procedure

1. Check SAP Note 147519 for the recommended SAP front-end release.2. Install the SAP front-end software required for your SAP system release as described in the documentation

SAP Frontend Installation Guide - <Release> at: https://wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/display/ATopics/SAP+GUI+Family

4.7 Preparing the Installation Media

This section describes how to prepare the installation media.

Installation media are available as follows:

● The Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive containing the installer.

80 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 81: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

You always have to download the latest version of the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive.● The media containing the software to be installed, which are available as follows:

○ You normally obtain the physical installation media as part of the installation package.○ You can also download the installation media apart from the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive

from https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter , as described at the end of this section.

You need several media during an SAP system installation. We recommend that you copy all relevant media for an instance installation to the IFS of the IBM i host before you install the instance.

For more information, see the section Copying the Installation Media Manually to your IBM i [page 87].

If you did not do so already, make sure you have configured your TCP/IP as described in SAP Note 92589 . Do not forget afterwards to perform an IPL to make the change effective. Otherwise, copy performance is poor from your local Windows media drive or your local Windows filesystem to the IFS on your IBM i.

NoteThe signature of media is checked automatically by the installer during the Define Parameters phase while processing the Media Browser screens. As of now the installer only accepts media whose signature has been checked. See also the description of this new security feature in SAP Note 2393060 .

Related Information

Downloading and Extracting the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 Archive [page 81]Using the Physical Media from the Installation Package [page 83]Downloading Installation Media [page 86]Copying the Installation Media Manually to Your IBM i [page 87]

4.7.1 Downloading and Extracting the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 Archive

You must always download and extract the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive from the SAP Software Download Center because you must use the latest version.

Context

You require the SAPCAR tool to be able to unpack and verify software component archives (*.SAR files). *.SAR is the format of software lifecycle media and tools that you can download from the SAP Software Download Center. For more information about how to get this tool, see the Procedure section below.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 81

Page 82: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

1. Download the latest version of the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive 70SWPM10SP<Support_Package_Number>_<Version_Number>.SAR from:

https://support.sap.com/sltoolset System Provisioning Download Software Provisioning Manager

2. If you did not do so already, make sure you have configured your TCP/IP as described in SAP Note 92589. Do not forget afterwards to perform an IPL to make the change effective. Otherwise, the file copying is

very slow from your local Windows optical media drive or Windows file system to the IFS on your IBM i.

3. Make sure that you use the latest version of the SAPCAR tool when manually extracting the Software Provisioning Manager archive.

NoteAn older SAPCAR version might extract archive files in a wrong way and this could prevent the installer from working consistently.

Proceed as follows to get the latest version of SAPCAR:

a. Go to https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter SUPPORT PACKAGES & PATCHES and search for “sapcar”.

b. Select the archive file for your operating system and download it to an empty directory.c. Rename the executable to sapcar.exe.

For more information about SAPCAR, see SAP Note 212876 .

4. Using the latest version of SAPCAR, you can verify the signature of the downloaded 70SWPM10SP<Support_Package_Number>_<Version_Number>.SAR archive as follows:

a. Get the latest version of the SAPCRYPTOLIB archive to your Windows PC as follows:

1. Go to https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter SUPPORT PACKAGES & PATCHES and search for “sapcryptolib”.

2. Select the archive file for your operating system and download it to the same directory where you have put the SAPCAR executable.

3. Use the following command to extract the SAPCRYPTOLIB archive to the same directory where you have put the SAPCAR executable:sapcar –xvf sapcryptolibp_84…sar –R <target directory>

4. Download the Certificate Revocation List from https://tcs.mysap.com/crl/crlbag.p7s and move it to the same directory.

b. Verify the signature of the downloaded 70SWPM10SP<Support_Package_Number>_<Version_Number>.SAR archive by executing the following command:

NoteCheck SAP Notes 2178665 and 1680045 whether additional information is available.

82 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 83: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

<Path to SAPCAR>\sapcar.exe -tvVf<Path to Download Directory>\70SWPM10SP<Support_Package_Number>_<Version_Number>.SAR -crl<file name of revocation list>

5. Unpack the Software Provisioning Manager archive to a local directory on your Windows PC using the following command:

<Path to SAPCAR>\sapcar.exe -xvf <Path to Download Directory>\70SWPM10SP<Support_Package_Number>_<Version_Number>.SAR <Path to Unpack Directory>

NoteMake sure that all users have read permissions for the directory where you want to unpack the installer.

CautionMake sure that you unpack the Software Provisioning Manager archive to a dedicated folder. Do not unpack it to the same folder as other installation media.

6. We recommend that you copy the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 to the IFS of the IBM i host. For more information about how to do this, see the section copy the installation media manually to your IBM i [page 87].

4.7.2 Using the Physical Media from the Installation Package

This section describes how you use the physical installation media as part of the installation package.

Context

The signature of media is checked automatically by the installer during the Define Parameters phase while the Media Browser screens are processed (see also Running the Installer [page 98] ). The installer only accepts media whose signature has been checked. For more information, see SAP Note 2393060 .

Procedure

1. Identify the required media for your installation as listed below.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 83

Page 84: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The following table shows the required media for the installation of an SAP system based on SAP NetWeaver Application Server dual-stack (ABAP+Java):

NoteFor a central system, where all mandatory instances reside on one host, you need the installation media that are required for the central instance, central services instance, and database instance.

Note

For more information about which kernel version to use, see SAP Note 1680045 . In addition, check the Product Availability Matrix at http://support.sap.com/pam

SAP Instance Installation Required Media

Central services instance (SCS instance)

○ Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive○ UC Kernel (folder K_<Version>_U_<OS>) where U means Unicode and N

means non-Unicode.

ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance)

○ Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive○ UC or NUC Kernel (folder K_<Version>_<N or U>_<OS>) where U means Uni­

code and N means non-Unicode.

NoteEvery new installation of an SAP system is Unicode. You can only use the non-Unicode kernel if you perform the system copy for a non-Unicode SAP system that has been upgraded to the current release.

Central instance ○ Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive○ UC or UC and NUC (folder K_<Version>_<N or U>_<OS>) where U means

Unicode and N means non-Unicode.

NoteEvery new installation of an SAP system is Unicode. You can only use the non-Unicode kernel if you perform the system copy for a non-Unicode SAP system that has been upgraded to the current release.

○ Java Components

84 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 85: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

SAP Instance Installation Required Media

Database instance ○ Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive○ UC or NUC Kernel (folder K_<Version>_<N or U>_<OS>) where U means Uni­

code and N means non-Unicode.

NoteEvery new installation of an SAP system is Unicode. You can only use the non-Unicode kernel if you perform the system copy for a non-Unicode SAP system that has been upgraded to the current release.

○ Java Components○ Installation Export

Dialog instance ○ Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive○ UC or UC and NUC (folder K_<Version>_<N or U>_<OS>) where U means

Unicode and N means non-Unicode.

NoteIf you install a dialog instance in an existing non-Unicode system, the dialog instance is created automatically as a non-Unicode instance. The installer checks whether a non-Unicode system exists and chooses the right executa­bles for the system type.

○ Java Components

2. Make the installation media available on each installation host as follows:a. Download and unpack the latest version of Software Provisioning Manager as described in

Downloading and Extracting the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 Archive [page 81].b. Make the installation media containing the software to be installed available.

To make the media available, copy the media manually to your IBM i host before you start the installation. Do not use the Media Browser dialog during the installation to copy the entire installation media from Windows to your IBM i host. Make sure that all users have read permissions for the directory where you want to unpack the installer.

You need to copy the installation media manually to your IBM i [page 87].

NoteDepending on your installation type, one or more instances can reside on the same host. You need to keep this in mind when you make the required installation media available on each installation host.

For a central system, you need to make all required installation media available on the single installation host.

Caution○ If you copy the media to disk, make sure that the paths to the destination location of the copied

media do not contain any blanks and commas.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 85

Page 86: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

3. If you want to perform target system installation in the context of a heterogeneous system copy you need a migration key. You can generate it at http://support.sap.com/migrationkey .

Related Information

Downloading and Extracting the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 Archive [page 81]

4.7.3 Downloading Installation Media

This section describes how you download installation media from the SAP Software Download Center.

Procedure

1. Download and unpack the latest version of Software Provisioning Manager as described in Downloading and Extracting the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 Archive [page 81].

2. Create a download directory on your Windows installation host from where you will transfer the installation media to your IBM i host (for example, c:\tmp\download).

3. Identify all download objects that belong to one installation medium according to the following criteria:

NoteInstallation media might be split into several files. In this case, you have to reassemble the required files after the download.

○ Download path or location:You can download installation media from the SAP Software Download Center using one of the following paths:

○ To download the kernel media, go to https://support.sap.com/sltoolset System Provisioning Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 SP<Current Version> Download Kernel releases delivered for SL Toolset SL TOOLSET 1.0 (INSTALLATIONS AND UPGRADES) KERNEL FOR INSTALLATION/SWPM .

○ To download all media required for your SAP product, you can use one of the following navigation paths:

○ https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter INSTALLATIONS & UPGRADESBy Category SAP NETWEAVER AND COMPLEMENTARY PRODUCTS <Product><Product Release>

○ https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter INSTALLATIONS & UPGRADESBy Alphabetical Index (A-Z) <First Letter of Product> <Product> <Product Release>

86 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 87: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

○ Material numberAll download objects that are part of an installation medium have the same material number and an individual sequence number:<Material_Number>_<Sequence_Number>

Example51031387_1

51031387_2

...

○ TitleAll objects that are part of a medium have the same title, such as <Solution><Media_Name><OS> or <Database>RDBMS<OS> for RDBMS media.

4. Download the objects to the download directory.5. To correctly recombine the media that are split into small parts, unpack all parts into the same directory.

In the unpacking directory, the system creates a subdirectory with a short text describing the medium and copies the data into it. The data is now all in the correct directory, the same as on the medium that was physically produced. For more information, see SAP Note 1258173 .

CautionMake sure that you unpack each installation media to a separate folder. Do not unpack installation media to the same folder were you unpack the Software Provisioning Manager archive.

6. You need to copy the installation media manually to your IBM i [page 87].

Related Information

Downloading Installation Media [page 86]

4.7.4 Copying the Installation Media Manually to Your IBM i

Use

This section describes a secure way to copy the required installation media from your Windows PC to your IBM i using OS version V7R2 and higher. To copy the media, you have to use a binary share TMPSAP. This guarantees that the content of the media is copied correctly from the Windows PC to your IBM i. No copied content is corrupted, and no copied files with longer file names are shortened by a converting share.

NoteThis procedure should not be used on a V7R1 IBM i host. On V7R1, you must use an alternative method such as FTP.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 87

Page 88: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

NoteIn the past, we suggested to create a binary share pointing to the root directory / on your IBM i host. We do not recommend this because it is not considered secure anymore.

Procedure

Creating a Binary Share on IBM i

If you do not already have a binary share TMPSAP on your IBM i, and you want to copy manually media from your Windows PC into the IFS of your IBM i, you have to create this share manually using the IBM Systems Director Navigator for i. To do so, proceed as follows:

1. Start the IBM Systems Director Navigator for i on your Windows PC.2. Connect to your IBM i using My Connections.

3. To create or change the share TMPSAP, choose File Systems File Shares .

4. Right-click File Shares Open i5/OS Netserver .A new screen i5/OS Netserver appears.

5. Click the folder Shared Objects to see the shares.

6. To check the already existing share TMPSAP or create a new share TMPSAP, right-click New File .

NoteThe share TMPSAP must have the access permission Read/Write and the path name should be /tmp/SAP.

If the directory /tmp/SAP does not exist directly create it manually as QSECOFR or installation user using the following command:

mkdir /tmp/SAP.

7. On the Text Conversion tab, do not select Allow file text conversion.8. To save the share TMPSAP, press OK.

Now you have created the share TMPSAP on your IBM i.

Copying the Installation Media Manually Using the Binary Share TMPSAP

1. To open the command prompt on Windows, choose Start Run .2. Enter cmd.exe.3. Press OK.

The command prompt appears.4. In the command prompt, enter net use.

All network connections to shared resources are displayed.5. Only valid for 'Software Component': SAP NetWeaver

Check if you have a connection to your IBM i.If you find \\<IBM_i_Host_Name>\TMPSAP in the Remote column and a drive directory letter in the Local column, you have already established the required connection to your IBM i.

88 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Preparation

Page 89: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Otherwise, you have to establish this connection. To do this, enter:net use X: \\<IBM_i_Host_Name>\TMPSAP SAP /USER:SAPIUSRX: is now your new network drive to share \\<IBM_i_Host_Name>\TMPSAP to your IFS on theIBM i. If X: is already in use, choose another drive letter that is free.

NoteWe use the user name SAPIUSR and the password SAP as examples. For more information about how to create the installation user SAPIUSR, see Preparing an IBM i User Profile [page 78].

End of 'Software Component': SAP NetWeaver

6. To change to the new network drive, enter X: in the command prompt.7. Create the subdirectories in your IFS where you want to copy the required media.

For each media, enter:mkdir /tmp/sap/<SAPSID>/<Media_Name> ormkdir /tmp/sap/<SAPSID>/<Unpack_Directory>

NoteYou must avoid blanks or commas in the media path name.

8. Copy the installation media from your Windows drive (for example D:\) or your download directory to the IFS of your IBM i host by entering the following command:xcopy D:\<Media> X:\<SAPSID>\<Media_Name> /E orxcopy C:\tmp\download\<Unpack_Directory> X:\<SAPSID>\<Unpack_Directory> /E

NoteYou must copy the root directory of the media respectively of the <Unpack_Directory> and all required subdirectories to the IFS of your IBM i.

9. For each required media, create a subdirectory and copy the required media.

NoteFor advanced users only: Instead of copying the complete media you also can copy only dedicated subdirectories. For IBM i the following directories have to be copied:

○ K_<Version>_<U or N>_OS400_PPC64○ EXP*○ JAVA*○ SL_CONTROLLER_<nnn>

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPreparation P U B L I C 89

Page 90: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

5 Installation

5.1 Installation Checklist

This section includes the installation steps for the following:

● Central system● Distributed system● High-availability system● Dialog instance

Detailed information about the steps are available in the linked sections.

NoteThe installer uses the UID and GID of the DEFAULT.PFL file in the SAPGLOBALHOST and assumes that the UID belongs to the user <SAPSID>ADM and the GID to the group R3GROUP. To have a successful distributed landscape installation, you must do the following:

1. Make sure the UID for the user<SAPSID>ADM and the GID for the group R3GROUP are available across all of the system landscape. You can set these values from the installer GUI.

2. Additional users <SAPSID>OWNER and SAP<SAPSID>DB are also created during the installation. The installer does not make sure the UIDs for these users match across the landscape. It is not required to have matching UIDs, but it causes delays during database switchover scenarios.

3. After installing the SAPGLOBALHOST, you must check to make sure that the DEFAULT.PFL file is owned by the user <SAPSID>ADM and the primary group is R3GROUP.

4. In every additional installation option on a host distinct from SAPGLOBALHOST, you must check that the installer contains the right values for UID and GID for the users displayed on the Summary screen.

Central System

1. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] on the central system host with option Central System to install the SAP system.

NoteBy default the SAP system is installed with an ASCS instance. If you do not want to install the ASCS instance, do not run installation option Central System. Instead, you have to follow the instructions in Installing a Central or Distributed System Without the ASCS Instance [page 150].

90 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 91: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

NoteIf you want to install an ASCS instance with integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20], you must choose the Custom parameter mode.

When processing the screens for the ASCS instance installation, you are prompted to mark a checkbox if you want to install an SAP Web Dispatcher instance with the ASCS instance. If you mark this checkbox, you are prompted for the additional parameters required for the SAP Web Dispatcher installation on the subsequent screens.

2. You continue with Post-Installation [page 111].

Distributed System

1. On the SAP transport host, you create the trans directory and make it available to the SAP global host, database, and central instance host. For more information, see Setting Up the Transport Directory [page 120].

2. You share the required file systems to the database and central instance host.3. On the ASCS instance host, proceed as follows:

1. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance).

NoteIf you do not want to install the ASCS instance, do not run installation option ASCS Instance. Instead, you have to follow the instructions in Installing a Central or Distributed System Without the ASCS Instance [page 150].

NoteIf you want to install an ASCS instance with integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20], you must choose the Custom parameter mode.

When processing the screens for the ASCS instance installation, you are prompted to mark a checkbox if you want to install an SAP Web Dispatcher instance with the ASCS instance. If you mark this checkbox, you are prompted for the additional parameters required for the SAP Web Dispatcher installation on the subsequent screens.

2. You share the required file systems to the database and central instance host.4. On the SCS instance host, proceed as follows:

1. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the central services instance (SCS instance).

5. On the database instance host, proceed as follows:1. You link the global directories [page 95] from the SAP global host and SAP transport host via QFileSvr.

400.2. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the database instance.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 91

Page 92: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6. On the central instance host, proceed as follows:

NoteYou can use the SAP transport host or the SAP global host as your central instance host.

1. You link the global directories [page 95] from the SAP global host and SAP transport host via QFileSvr.400.

2. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the central instance.7. If required, you install one or more dialog instances on the chosen hosts as described in subsection Dialog

Instance of this section.1. You link the global directories [page 95] from the SAP global host and SAP transport host via

QFileSvr.400.2. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the dialog instance.

8. You continue with Post-Installation [page 111].

Graphical Overview

The following figure shows how you install the various instances in a distributed system:

Distribution of Instances in an ABAP+Java System

High-Availability System

This section describes how you install a high-availability (HA) system consisting of two nodes (host A and host B). For more information, consult your HA partner.

92 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 93: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

This procedure describes the steps that are required for a hardware cluster consisting of two nodes (host A and host B):

1. If you want to share the transport directory trans from another remote system, you have to make it available on this system. For more information, see Setting Up the Transport Directory [page 120]. Otherwise, we recommend that you share the trans directory that is created during the installation of the central instance.

2. You set up the switchover cluster infrastructure as follows:1. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the ABAP central

services instance (ASCS instance) using the virtual host name [page 58] on the primary cluster node, host A.

NoteIf you want to install an ASCS instance with integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20], you must choose the Custom parameter mode.

When processing the screens for the ASCS instance installation, you are prompted to mark a checkbox if you want to install an SAP Web Dispatcher instance with the ASCS instance. If you mark this checkbox, you are prompted for the additional parameters required for the SAP Web Dispatcher installation on the subsequent screens.

2. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the central services instance (SCS instance) using the virtual host name [page 58] on the primary cluster node, host A.

3. You prepare the standby cluster node, host B, making sure that it meets the Hardware and Software Requirements [page 27] and it has all the necessary file systems, mount points, and (if required) Network File System (NFS).

4. You configure the switchover software and test that switchover functions correctly to all standby nodes in the cluster.

3. On the database instance host, proceed as follows:

RecommendationWe recommend that the database instance is part of the hardware cluster or of any other proprietary high-availability solution for the database.

1. You link the global directories [page 95] from the SAP global host and SAP transport host via QFileSvr.400.

2. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the database instance.

4. On the central instance host, proceed as follows:

NoteIn a high-availability installation, the central instance does not need to be part of the cluster because it is no longer a single point of failure (SPOF). The SPOF is now in the ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance), and the central services instances (SCS instance), which are protected by the cluster.

1. You link the global directories [page 95] from the SAP global host and SAP transport host via QFileSvr.400.

2. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the central instance.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 93

Page 94: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

5. We recommend that you install dialog instances with the installer to create redundancy. The application server instances are not a SPOF. Therefore, do not include these instances in the cluster.1. You link the global directories [page 95] from the SAP global host and SAP transport host via

QFileSvr.400.2. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the dialog instance.

6. You continue with Post-Installation [page 111].

Graphical Overview

The following figure provides an overview of how you install the various instances in a high-availability installation:

Distribution of Instances in an ABAP+Java System

Dialog Instance

You perform the following steps on the host where you install the dialog instance.

1. You check the prerequisites [page 96] and run the installer [page 98] to install the dialog instance.2. You continue with Post-Installation [page 111].

94 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 95: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

5.2 Linking Global Directories

Use

If you install a database or a dialog instance on a host other than the SAP global host, you must make global directories from the SAP global host available.

Prerequisites

You make sure the /QFileSvr.400/<SAPGLOBALHOST> directory is always available after the initial program load (IPL) of the additional host.

For more information, see Adjusting Startup Program QSTRUP [page 67].

Procedure

1. Make sure that the global transport directory is also available on every host where you want to install an SAP instance. Otherwise, the installation fails. For more information, see Setting Up the Transport Directory [page 120].

2. Log on to the host of the new instance that you want to install as the user with user class *SECOFR that later executes the installation. This user must exist in all systems in the distributed system landscape.For more information about how to create the installation user, see Preparing an IBM User Profile [page 78].

3. Create the following link to the SAP global host file system:ADDLNK OBJ('/QFileSvr.400/<SAPGLOBALHOST>/sapmnt/<SAPSID>') NEWLNK('/sapmnt/<SAPSID>')

5.3 Specifying the Initial Data Source of the User Management Engine

During the installation of your SAP system, you have to specify the initial data source of the User Management Engine (UME).

Prerequisites

You have planned how you want to configure user and access management for your SAP system to be installed as described in Planning User and Access Management [page 34].

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 95

Page 96: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

Using AS ABAP

You install your SAP system as described in this installation guide. During the installation, the SAP system is automatically configured to use AS ABAP as data source for the User Management Engine (UME). After the installation has finished, you can still change the user management configuration. For more information, see Configuring User Management [page 127].

Using an LDAP directory as Source for User Data

1. You install your SAP system as described in this installation guide.2. Configure the user management of the newly installed SAP system to use an LDAP directory.

For more information, see Configuring User Management [page 127].

5.4 Prerequisites for Running the Installer

Make sure you fulfil the following prerequisites before running the installer.

● For the SL Common GUI, make sure that the following web browser requirements are met:○ You have one of the following supported browsers on the device where you want to run the SL

Common GUI: Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Microsoft Edge, or Microsoft Internet Explorer 11. Always use the latest version of these web browsers.

RecommendationWe recommend using Google Chrome.

○ If you copy the SL Common GUI URL manually in the browser window, make sure that you open a new Web browser window in private browsing mode (Internet Explorer), incognito mode (Chrome) or private browsing mode (Firefox). This is to prevent Web browser plugins and settings from interfering with the SL Common GUI.

For more information about the SL Common GUI, see Useful Information About the Installer [page 102].

● Make sure that you have logged on to your host as an installation user with similar authorization rights to QSECOFR. For more information about how to create an installation user, see Preparing an IBM i User Profile [page 78].

● Make sure that you have specified the most important SAP system parameters as described in Basic SAP System Installation Parameters [page 35] before you start the installation.

● Check that your installation hosts meet the requirements for the installation options that you want to install. For more information, see Running the Prerequisite Checker [page 27].

● If you are installing a second or subsequent SAP system into an existing database, see Multiple SAP Systems on a Single Host [page 146].

96 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 97: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● Check the value of the environment variable TEMP, TMP, or TMPDIR:

Shells and Commands

Shell Used Command

Command prompt WRKENVVAR

Qp2Term echo $TEMP

○ Make sure that your operating system does not delete the contents of the temporary directory /tmp or the contents of the directories to which the variable TEMP, TMP, or TMPDIR points – for example, by using a crontab entry.

○ Each SAP instance requires a separate installation directory.

RecommendationWe recommend that you keep all installation directories until the system is completely and correctly installed.

○ Make sure that you have at least 60 MB of free space in the installer directory for each installer option. In addition, you need 200 MB free space for the installer executables. If you cannot provide 200 MB free space in the temporary directory, you can set one of the environment variables TEMP, TMP, or TMPDIR to another directory with 200 MB free space for the installer executables.

● If you want to install a dialog instance to an existing SAP system, make sure that:○ There is exactly one entry in the /usr/sap/sapservices file for each SAP instance installed on this

host. Make sure that you check that the entry refers to the correct profile.○ There are no profile backup files with an underscore “_” in their profile name. If so, replace the “_” with

a “.”.

ExampleRename /usr/sap/S14/SYS/profile/S14_DVEBMGS20_zsi-aix693p2_D20081204 to /usr/sap/S14/SYS/profile/S14_DVEBMGS20_zsi-aix693p2.D20081204.

● Make sure that the following ports are not used by other processes:○ Port 4237 is used by default as HTTPS port for communication between the installer and the SL

Common GUI.If this port cannot be used, you can assign a free port number by executing sapinst with the following command line parameter:SAPINST_HTTPS_PORT=<Free Port Number>

ExampleCD DIR('<Path_To_Unpack_Directory>')

CALL PGM(QP2TERM) PARM('./sapinst' 'SAPINST_HTTPS_PORT=<Free Port Number>')

○ Port 4239 is used by default for displaying the feedback evaluation form at the end of the installer processing.The filled-out evaluation form is then sent to SAP using HTTPS.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 97

Page 98: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

If this port cannot be used, you can assign a free port number by executing sapinst with the following command line parameter:SAPINST_HTTP_PORT=<Free Port Number>

5.5 Running the Installer

This section describes how to run the installation tool Software Provisioning Manager (the “installer” for short).

Prerequisites

For more information, see Prerequisites for Running the Installer [page 96].

Context

Software Provisioning Manager (the “installer” for short) has a web browser-based GUI named “SL Common GUI of the Software Provisioning Manager” - “SL Common GUI” for short.

This procedure describes an installation where you run the installer and use the SL Common GUI, that is you can control the processing of the installer from a browser running on any device.

For more information about the SL Common GUI, see Useful Information About the Installer [page 102].

Procedure

1. Log on to the installation host as a user with similar authorization rights to QSECOFR. For more information, see Preparing an IBM i User Profile [page 78].

CautionMake sure that the installation user has not set any environment variables for a different SAP system or database or database by using the command WRKENVVAR.

If your security policy requires that the person running the installer is not allowed to know QSECOFR like credentials on the installation host, you can specify another operating system user for authentication purposes. You do this using the SAPINST_REMOTE_ACCESS_USER parameter when starting the sapinst executable from the command line. You have to confirm that the user is a trusted one. For more information, see SAP Note 1745524 .

2. Make the installation media available.

For more information, see Preparing the Installation Media [page 80].

98 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 99: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

RecommendationMake the installation media available locally . For example, if you use Network File System (NFS), reading from media mounted with NFS might fail.

3. Start the installer from the directory to which you unpacked the Software Provisioning Manager archive by entering the following command:

CD DIR('<Path_To_Unpack Directory>')

CALL PGM(QP2TERM) PARM('./sapinst')

NoteIf you want to use a virtual host name, start the installer with the installer property SAPINST_USE_HOSTNAME as follows:

CALL PGM(QP2TERM) PARM('./sapinst' 'SAPINST_USE_HOSTNAME=<Virtual_Host_Name>')

For more information, see Using Virtual Host Names [page 58].

CautionMake sure that the installation directory is not mounted with NFS, otherwise there might be problems when the Java Virtual Machine is started.

4. The installer is starting up.

The installer now starts and waits for the connection with the SL Common GUI.

You can find the URL you require to access the SL Common GUI at the bottom of the shell from which you are running the installer.

...************************************************************************Open your browser and paste the following URL address to access the GUI https://[<hostname>]:4237/sapinst/docs/index.html Logon users: [<users>] ************************************************************************...

Open the URL on a device with a supported web browser (see Prerequisites for Running the Installer [page 96]).

The SL Common GUI opens in the browser by displaying the Welcome screen.

NoteBefore you reach the Welcome screen, your browser might warn you that the certificate of the sapinst process on this computer could not be verified. Accept this warning to inform your browser that it can trust this site, even if the certificate could not be verified.

5. On the Welcome screen, choose the required option:○ Install an SAP system

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 99

Page 100: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

○ To install an SAP NetWeaver Process Integration system, choose:SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Support Release or Enhancement Package> SAP Process

Integration <Database> <System Variant> .○ To install an SAP NetWeaver Mobile Infrastructure system, choose:

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Support Release or Enhancement Package> SAP Mobile Infrastructure <Database> <System Variant> .

○ To install an SAP Solution Manager system, choose SAP Solution Manager <Release> SAP Systems <Database> <System Variant> .

○ Perform other tasks or install additional componentsGo to <Product> Software Life-Cycle Options and choose the required task.

6. Choose Next.

NoteIf there are errors during the self-extraction process of the installer, you can find the log file dev_selfex.out in the temporary directory.

7. Follow the instructions on the installer input screens and enter the required parameters.

NoteTo find more information on each parameter during the Define Parameters phase, position the cursor on the required parameter input field , and choose either F1 or the HELP tab. Then the available help text is displayed in the HELP tab.

NoteIf you want to install an ASCS instance with integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20], you must choose the Custom parameter mode.

When processing the screens for the ASCS instance installation, you are prompted to mark a checkbox if you want to install an SAP Web Dispatcher instance with the ASCS instance. If you mark this checkbox, you are prompted for the additional parameters required for the SAP Web Dispatcher installation on the subsequent screens.

CautionThe signature of media is checked automatically during the Define Parameters phase while processing the Media Browser screens.

Keep in mind that this automatic check is only committed once and not repeated if you modify artefacts such as SAR archives or files on the media after the initial check has been done. This means that - if you modify artefacts later on either during the remaining Define Parameters phase or later on during the Execute Service phase - the signature is not checked again.

See also the description of this new security feature in SAP Note 2393060 .

8. After you have entered all requested input parameters, the installer displays the Parameter Summary screen. This screen shows both the parameters that you entered and those that the installer set by default. If required, you can revise the parameters before starting the installation.

100 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 101: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

9. To start the installation, choose Next.

The installer starts the installation and displays the progress of the installation.

When the installation option has finished successfully, the installer displays the message Execution of <Option Name> has completed.

10. If required, install a dialog instance for a central system or distributed system.11. If required, delete directories with the name sapinst_exe.xxxxxx.xxxx after the installer has finished.

Sometimes these remain in the temporary directory.

RecommendationKeep all installation directories until you are sure that the system, including all instances, is completely and correctly installed. Once the system is completely and correctly installed, make a copy of the installation directories with all their contents. Save the copy to a physically separate medium, such as a medium or a USB drive that is separate from your installation hosts.

This might be useful for analyzing issues occurring later when you use the system. For security reasons, do not keep installation directories on installation hosts, but make sure that you delete them after saving them separately.

12. For security reasons, we recommend that you delete the .sapinst directory within the home directory of the user with which you ran the installer:

/home/<Installation_User>/.sapinst13. If you copied installation media to your hard disk, you can delete these files when the installation has

successfully completed.14. For security reasons, we recommend that you remove the group SAPINST from the operating system users

after you have completed the installation.

NoteThis step is only required, if you did not specify during the Define Parameters phase that the group SAPINST is to be removed from the operating system users after the execution of the installer has completed.

5.6 Additional Information About the Installer

The following sections provide additional information about the installer.

Useful Information About the Installer [page 102]This section contains some useful technical background information about the installer and the installer GUI.

Interrupted Processing of the Installer [page 104]Here you find information about how to restart the installer if its processing has been interrupted.

Entries in the Services File Created by the Installer [page 106]

Troubleshooting with the Installer [page 107]

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 101

Page 102: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

This section tells you how to proceed when errors occur while the installer is running.

Troubleshooting During the Database Load [page 108]

Using the Step State Editor (SAP Support Experts Only) [page 109]This section describes how to use the Step State Editor available in the installer.

5.6.1 Useful Information About the Installer

This section contains some useful technical background information about the installer and the installer GUI.

● Software Provisioning Manager (the “installer” for short) has the web browser-based “SL Common GUI of the Software Provisioning Manager” - “SL Common GUI” for short.The SL Common GUI uses the SAP UI Development Toolkit for HTML5 - also known as SAPUI5 - a client-side HTML5 rendering library based on JavaScript. The benefits of this new user interface technology for the user are:○ Zero foot print, since only a web browser is required on the client○ New controls and functionality, for example, view logs in web browser.

The SL Common GUI connects the web browser on a client with the sapinst executable - which is part of Software Provisioning Manager - running on the installation host using the standard protocol HTTPS.For the SL Common GUI the installer provides a pre-generated URL at the bottom of the shell from which you are running the installer . If you have a supported web browser installed on the host where you run the installer, you can start the SL Common GUI directly from this URL. Otherwise, open a web browser supported by the SL Common GUI on any device and run the URL from there.For more information about supported web browsers see Prerequisites for Running the Installer [page 96].If you need to run the SL Common GUI in accessibility mode, apply the standard accessibility functions of your web browser.

● As soon as you have started the sapinst executable, the installer creates a .sapinst directory underneath the /home/<User> directory where it keeps its log files. <User> is the user with which you have started the installer.After you have reached the Welcome screen and selected the relevant installer option for the SAP system or instance to be installed , the installer creates a directory sapinst_instdir where it keeps its log files, and which is located directly below the temporary directory. The installer finds the temporary directory by checking the value of the TEMP, TMP, or TMPDIR environment variable. If no value is set for these variables, the installer uses /tmp by default.All log files which have been stored so far in the .sapinst folder are moved to the sapinst_instdir directory as soon as the latter has been created.If you want the sapinst_instdir directory to be created in another directory than /tmp, set the environment variable TEMP, TMP, or TMPDIR to this directory before you start the installer.

Shell Used Command

Command prompt ADDENVVAR ENVVAR(TEMP) VALUE('<Directory>') REPLACE(*YES)

Qp2Term export TEMP=<Directory>

102 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 103: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

NoteWhen you leave your Qp2Term session, all changes of the environment variables done by the command export are reverted.

CautionMake sure that the installation directory is not mounted with NFS, or there might be problems when the Java Virtual Machine is started.

RecommendationWe recommend that you keep all installation directories until the system is completely and correctly installed.

● The installer extracts itself to a temporary directory called sapinst_exe.xxxxxx.xxxx, which is located in the environment variables TEMP, TMP, or TMPDIR. These files are deleted after the installer has stopped running.The temporary directory sapinst_exe.xxxxxx.xxxx sometimes remains undeleted. You can safely delete it.The temporary directory also contains the log file dev_selfex.out from the self-extraction process of the installer, which might be useful if an error occurs.

CautionIf the installer cannot find a temporary directory, the installation terminates with the error FCO-00058.

● To see a list of all available installer properties, enter the following commands:CD DIR('<Path_To_Unpack_Directory>')CALL PGM(QP2TERM) PARM('./sapinst' '-p')

● If you want to install an SAP system in unattended mode, see SAP Note 2230669 which describes an improved procedure using inifile.params.

● If required, stop the installer by choosing the Cancel button.

NoteIf you need to terminate the installer, press Shift + Esc then 2 on your IBM i host.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 103

Page 104: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

5.6.2 Interrupted Processing of the Installer

Here you find information about how to restart the installer if its processing has been interrupted.

Context

The processing of the installer might be interrupted for one of the following reasons:

● An error occurred during the Define Parameters or Execute phase:The installer does not abort the installation in error situations. If an error occurs, the installation pauses and a dialog box appears. The dialog box contains a short description of the choices listed in the table below as well as a path to a log file that contains detailed information about the error.

● You interrupted the processing of the installer by choosing Cancel in the SL Common GUI.

CautionIf you stop an option in the Execute phase, any system or component installed by this option is incomplete and not ready to be used. Any system or component uninstalled by this option is not completely uninstalled.

The following table describes the options in the dialog box:

Option Definition

Retry The installer retries the installation from the point of failure without repeating any of the previous steps.

This is possible because the installer records the installation progress in the keydb.xml file.

We recommend that you view the entries in the log files, try to solve the problem, and then choose Retry.

If the same or a different error occurs, the installer displays the same dialog box again.

Stop The installer stops the installation, closing the dialog box, the installer GUI, and the GUI server.

The installer records the installation progress in the keydb.xml file. Therefore, you can continue the installation from the point of failure without repeating any of the previous steps. See the procedure below.

Continue The installer continues the installation from the current point.

View Log Access installation log files.

The following procedure describes the steps to restart an installation, which you stopped by choosing Stop, or to continue an interrupted installation after an error situation.

104 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 105: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

1. Log on to the installation host as a user with the required permissions as described in Running the Installer [page 98] .

2. Make sure that the installation media are still available.

For more information, see Preparing the Installation Media [page 80].

RecommendationMake the installation media available locally. For example, if you use remote file shares on other Windows hosts, CIFS shares on third-party SMB-servers, or Network File System (NFS), reading from media mounted with NFS might fail.

3. Restart the installer from the installation media directory to which you unpacked the Software Provisioning Manager archive.

Enter the following commands:

CD DIR('<Path_To_Unpack_Directory>')

CALL PGM(QP2TERM) PARM('./sapinst') 4. The installer is restarting.

The installer now starts and waits for the connection with the SL Common GUI.

You can find the URL you require to access the SL Common GUI at the bottom of the shell from which you are running the installer.

...************************************************************************Open your browser and paste the following URL address to access the GUI https://[<hostname>]:4237/sapinst/docs/index.html Logon users: [<users>] ************************************************************************...

Open the URL on a device with a supported web browser (see Prerequisites for Running the Installer [page 96]).

The SL Common GUI opens in the browser by displaying the Welcome screen.

NoteBefore you reach the Welcome screen, your browser might warn you that the certificate of the sapinst process on this computer could not be verified. Accept this warning to inform your browser that it can trust this site, even if the certificate could not be verified.

5. From the tree structure on the Welcome screen, select the installation option that you want to continue and choose Next.

The What do you want to do? screen appears.6. On the What do you want to do? screen, decide between the following alternatives and continue with Next:

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 105

Page 106: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Alternative Behavior

Perform a new run The installer does not continue the interrupted installation option. Instead, it moves the content of the old installer directory and all installer-specific files to a backup directory. Afterwards, you can no longer continue the old option.

The following naming convention is used for the backup directory:

log_<Day>_<Month>_<Year>_<Hours>_<Minutes>_<Seconds>

Examplelog_01_Oct_2016_13_47_56

NoteAll actions taken by the installation before you stopped it (such as creating directories or users) are not revoked.

CautionThe installer moves all the files and folders to a new log directory, even if these files and folders are owned by other users. If there are any processes currently running on these files and folders, they might no longer function properly.

Continue with the existing one The installer continues the interrupted installation from the point of failure.

5.6.3 Entries in the Services File Created by the Installer

After the installation has finished successfully, the installer has created the following entries in the service table:

To review the entries, use the command WRKSRVTBLE.

Service Table

Service Port Protocol

sapdp<nn> 32<nn> tcp

sapdp<nn>s 47<nn> tcp

sapgw<nn> 33<nn> tcp

sapgw<nn>s 48<nn> tcp

106 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 107: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Service Port Protocol

sapms<SAPSID> 36<nn>

(unless you specified another value during the in­stallation)

tcp

sapxdn<SAPSID> 96<xx> tcp

Note● There is a port created for every possible instance number, regardless of which instance number you

specified during the installation. For example, for sapgw<Instance_Number> = 33<Instance_Number>/tcp the following range of entries is created:sapgw00 = 3300/tcpsapgw01 = 3301/tcpsapgw02 = 3302/tcp[...]sapgw98 = 3398/tcpsapgw99 = 3399/tcp

● If there is more than one entry for the same port number, this is not an error.● <Instance_Number> is the number of the instance in which the ABAP message server is running.

5.6.4 Troubleshooting with the Installer

This section tells you how to proceed when errors occur while the installer is running.

Context

If an error occurs, the installer:

● Stops processing● Displays a dialog informing you about the error

Procedure

1. Check SAP Note 1548438 for known installer issues.2. If an error occurs during the Define Parameters or the Execute Service phase, do one of the following:

○ Try to solve the problem:○ To check the installer log files (sapinst.log and sapinst_dev.log) for errors, choose the LOG

FILES tab.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 107

Page 108: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

NoteThe LOG FILES tab is only available if you have selected on the Welcome screen the relevant installer option for the SAP product to be installed .

If you need to access the log files before you have done this selection, you can find them in the .sapinst directory underneath the /home/<User> directory, where <User> is the user which you used to start the installer.

Fore more information, see Useful Information About the Installer [page 102].

○ To check the log and trace files of the installer GUI for errors, go to the directory /home/<Installation_User>/.sapinst/

○ Then continue by choosing Retry.○ If required, abort the installer by choosing Cancel in the tool menu and restart the installer. For more

information, see Interrupted Processing of the Installer [page 104].3. If you cannot resolve the problem, report an incident using the appropriate subcomponent of BC-INS*.

For more information about using subcomponents of BC-INS*, see SAP Note 1669327 .

5.6.5 Troubleshooting During the Database Load

Use

The database load is divided into several sections, which are performed in parallel. Each section writes a log file to your installation directory. The names of these files are as follows:

● SAP0000.log● SAPUSER.log● SAPSSRC.log● SAPSSEXC.log● SAPSPROT.log● SAPSLOAD.log● SAPSLEXC.log● SAPSDIC.log● SAPSDOCU.log● SAPPOOL.log● SAPCLUST.log● SAPAPPL2.log● SAPAPPL1.log● SAPAPPL0.log● SAPVIEW.log● SAPDDIM.log● SAPDFACT.log● SAPDODS.log

108 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 109: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

1. If errors occur during database load find out which load process failed by checking the log files. You can do this by entering:EDTF '/<Installation_Directory>/<Log_File>.log'

ExampleEDTF '/<Installation_Directory>/SAPSDIC.log'

The log file contains additional information about the status of the job and the corresponding IBM i job.2. Scroll to the bottom of this file and check the error message.

The start of each import attempt is logged to this file and looks like this:TS61CEO34/R3LOADDB4: START OF LOG: 20010926170456TS61CEO34/R3LOADDB4: sccsid @(#) $Id://bas/620_COR/src/R3ld/R3load/R3ldmain.c#4 $ SAPTS61CEO34/R3LOADDB4: version R6.10/V1.TS61CEO34/R3LOADDB4 -i SAPSDIC.cmd -p SAPSDIC.log -nojournal-datacodepage 1100 -dbcodepage 0120...

No Journaling During the Database Load

You should keep in mind that the new tables are not journaled during the database load. Therefore, you receive the following message:

SQL7905 Information 20 10/21/01 17:18:38 QSQCRTT QSYS 1013 QSQCRTT

Message . . . . : Table <table_name> in R3<SID>DATA created but could not be journaled.

You can ignore this message. Journaling is switched on later.

5.6.6 Using the Step State Editor (SAP Support Experts Only)

This section describes how to use the Step State Editor available in the installer.

NoteOnly use the Step State Editor if SAP Support requests you to do so, for example to resolve a customer incident.

Prerequisites

● SAP Support requests you to use theStep State Editor.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iInstallation P U B L I C 109

Page 110: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● Make sure that the host where you run the installer meets the requirements listed in Prerequisites for Running the Installer [page 96].

Procedure

1. Start the installer from the command line as described in Running the Installer [page 98] with the additional command line parameter SAPINST_SET_STEPSTATE=true

2. Follow the instructions on the installer screens and fill in the parameters prompted during the Define Parameters phase until you reach the Parameter Summary screen.

3. Choose Next.

The Step State Editor opens as an additional dialog. Within this dialog you see a list of all steps to be executed by the installer during the Execute Service phase. By default all steps are in an initial state. Underneath each step, you see the assigned installer component. For each step you have a Skip and a Break option.

○ Mark the checkbox in front of the Break option of the steps where you want the installer to pause.○ Mark the checkbox in front of the Skip option of the steps which you want the installer to skip.

4. After you have marked all required steps with either the Break or the Skip option, choose OK on the Step State Editor dialog.

The installer starts processing the Execute Service phase and pauses one after another when reaching each step whose Break option you have marked. You can now choose one of the following:

○ Choose OK to continue with this step.○ Choose Step State Editor to return to the Step State Editor and make changes, for example you can

repeat the step by marking the checkbox in front of the Repeat option.○ Choose Cancel to abort the installer.

5. Continue until you have run through all the steps of the Execute Service phase of the installer.

110 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Installation

Page 111: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6 Post-Installation

6.1 Post-Installation Checklist

This section includes the post-installation steps that you have to perform for the following installation options:

● Central, distributed, or high-availability system● Dialog instance

Detailed information about the steps are available in the linked sections.

Central, Distributed, or High-Availability System

You have to complete the following post-installation steps, which are described in more detail in the linked chapters:

1. If required, you perform a full backup [page 138] immediately after the installation has finished.2. You check whether you can log on to the Application Server ABAP [page 112].3. You check whether you can log on to the Application Server Java [page 114].4. You provide access to the SAP NetWeaver Administrator [page 115].5. You install the SAP license [page 115].6. If you installed a high-availability system, you set up the licenses for high availability [page 116].7. You configure the remote connection to SAP support [page 117].8. You install the SAP online documentation [page 117].9. You perform the consistency check [page 118].10. You set up the secondary host for IASP switchover [page 119].11. You set up the transport directory [page 120].12. You configure the Transport Management System [page 121].13. For production systems it is highly recommended that you connect the system to SAP Solution Manager

[page 122].14. You apply the latest kernel and Support Package stacks [page 124].15. You perform post-installation steps for the application server ABAP [page 124].16. If required, you install additional languages and perform language transport [page 126].17. You configure the user management [page 127].18. You ensure user security [page 128].19. To perform basic configuration steps, you run the Configuration Wizard [page 134].20.You decide on your production client [page 135].21. You perform the client copy [page 136].22. You remove the installation files of the installer [page 137].23. You perform a full backup of the installation [page 138].24. You check the Master Guide for your SAP Business Suite application or SAP NetWeaver application

(chapter Configuration of Systems and Follow-Up Activities) for further implementation and configuration

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 111

Page 112: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

steps, such as language installation, monitoring, work processes, transports, SAP license, printers, system logs, and connectivity to system landscape directory (SLD).

Dialog Instance

You have to complete the following post-installation steps, which are described in more detail in the linked chapters:

1. If required, you perform a full backup [page 138] immediately after the installation has finished.2. You check whether you can log on to the Application Server ABAP [page 112].3. You check whether you can log on to the Application Server Java [page 114].4. You install the SAP online documentation [page 117].5. You set up the transport directory [page 120].6. You ensure user security [page 128].7. You remove the installation files of the installer [page 137].8. You perform a full backup of the installation [page 138].9. If you chose to install an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher instance within the ASCS instance, you log on to

the SAP Web Dispatcher Management Console [page 140]10. If you chose to install an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher instance within the ASCS instance, you configure

the SAP Web Dispatcher [page 141]

6.2 Logging On to the Application Server ABAP

You need to check that you can log on to the Application Server ABAP with the standard users, given in the table below.

Prerequisites

● The SAP system is up and running.● You have installed the SAP front-end software.

Context

NoteIn a distributed or high-availability system, you check whether you can log on to every instance of the SAP system that you installed.

112 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 113: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

User User Name Client

SAP system user SAP* 000, 001, 066

DDIC 000, 001

You access the application server ABAP using SAP Logon

Procedure

1. Start SAP Logon on the host where you have installed the front end as follows:

○ SAP GUI for Windows:○ Windows Server 2012 (R2) and higher:

1. Press Windows + Q , and enter SAP Logon in the Search field.2. Choose SAP Logon.

○ Windows Server 2008 (R2):Choose Start All Programs SAP Front End SAP Logon .

○ SAP GUI for Java:○ Windows Server 2012 (R2) and higher:

1. Press Windows + Q , and enter SAP GUI for Java <Release>2. Choose SAP GUI for Java <Release>.

○ Windows Server 2008 (R2):Choose Start All Programs SAP Clients SAP GUI for Java <Release> .

The SAP Logon appears.

NoteYou can alternatively enter the command guilogon in the SAP GUI installation directory to start SAP GUI for Java.

2. Create a logon entry for the newly installed system in the SAP Logon.For more information about creating new logon entries, press F1 .

3. When you have created the entry, log on as user SAP* or DDIC.

Related Information

Installing the SAP Front-End Software [page 80]

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 113

Page 114: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6.3 Logging On to the Application Server Java

You need to check that you can log on to the Application Server Java with the appropriate administrator user, given in the table below.

Prerequisites

The SAP system is up and running.

Context

NoteIn a distributed or high-availability system, you check whether you can log on to every instance of the SAP system that you installed.

User User Name Storage: ABAP System

Administrator J2EE_ADMIN (default) or the name you gave this user during the installation proc­ess.

You access AS Java with a URL using a web browser from your client machines. To log on to the application server Java, proceed as follows:

Procedure

1. Start a web browser and enter the following URL:

http://<Hostname_of_AS_Java_Server>:5<Instance_Number>00

NoteYou must always enter a two-digit number for <Instance_Number>. For example, do not enter 1 but instead enter 01.

ExampleIf you installed SAP NetWeaver Application Server for Java on host saphost06 and the instance number of your SAP NetWeaver Application Server for Java is 04, enter the following URL:

http://saphost06:50400

114 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 115: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The start page of the SAP NetWeaver Application Server for Java appears in the web browser.2. Log on by pressing the link of any of the provided applications, for example SAP NetWeaver Administrator

or System Information.

6.4 Providing Access to the SAP NetWeaver Administrator

Due to security restrictions, the SAP NetWeaver Administrator can only be accessed locally via http://<Hostname_Of_J2EE_Engine_Server>:5<Instance_Number>00/nwa after the installation has finished.

Procedure

Allow access to administration requests for the required network segments as described in SAP Note 1451753.

6.5 Installing the SAP License

You must install a permanent SAP license.

Context

When you install your SAP system, a temporary license is automatically installed.

CautionBefore the temporary license expires, you must apply for a permanent license key from SAP.

We recommend that you apply for a permanent license key as soon as possible after installing your system.

For more information about SAP license keys and how to obtain them, see

http://support.sap.com/licensekey .

Procedure

Install the SAP license as described in SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver PlatformSAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Application Help Key Areas of SAP NetWeaver

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 115

Page 116: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability SAP Licenses SAP License Key / SAP Licensing Procedure

6.6 High Availability: Setting Up Licenses

You need to install a permanent license, which is determined by the hardware environment of the message server.

Prerequisites

The SAP system is up and running.

Context

Every SAP system needs a central license, which is determined by the environment of the message server. Since SAP's high-availability (HA) solution stipulates 2 or more cluster nodes (host machines) where the message server is enabled to run, you have to order as many license keys [page 115] as you have cluster nodes.

When we receive confirmation from your vendor that you are implementing a switchover environment, we provide the required license keys for your system, 1 key for each machine.

SAP has implemented a license mechanism for transparent and easy use with switchover solutions and clustered environments. Your customer key is calculated on the basis of local information on the message server host. This is the host machine where the ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance) runs. There is no license problem when only the database is switched over.

Procedure

1. Make sure that the ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance) on the primary host, node A, is running.

2. To find the hardware ID of the primary host, log on to any application server instance of the SAP system and call transaction SLICENSE.

3. Perform a switchover of the ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance) to another node in the cluster and repeat the previous step.Repeat this for all remaining nodes in the cluster.

4. To obtain the two license keys, enter the hardware IDs for the primary and backup hosts at:

http://support.sap.com/licensekey5. To import the files containing the two licenses, log on to any application server instance of the SAP system

and call transaction SLICENSE.

116 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 117: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6. Perform a switchover of the ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance) to another node in the cluster and repeat the previous step.Repeat this for all remaining nodes in the cluster.

Results

The license is no longer a problem during switchover. This means you do not need to call saplicense in your switchover scripts.

6.7 Configuring Remote Connection to SAP Support

SAP offers its customers access to support and a number of remote services such as the Early Watch Service or the GoingLive Service. Therefore, you have to set up a remote network connection to SAP.

For more information, see SAP Support Portal at https://support.sap.com/remote-support.html .

6.8 Installing SAP Online Documentation

You can install SAP online documentation as application help.

Context

SAP currently provides an HTML-based solution for the online documentation, including the Application Help, Glossary, Implementation Guide (IMG), and Release Notes. You can display the documentation with a Java-compatible Web browser on all front-end platforms supported by SAP.

Procedure

Install the application help in your SAP system as described in the README.TXT file contained in the root directory of the application help media.

Online documentation media are delivered as part of the installation package. You can also download them from https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter Installations & Upgrades By Category<Product> <Product Version> APPLICATION HELP (SAP LIBRARY) .

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 117

Page 118: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter Installations & Upgrades By Category SAP NETWEAVER AND COMPLEMENTARY PRODUCTS SAP NETWEAVER SAP EHP2 FOR SAP NETWEAVER 7.0

APPLICATION HELP (SAP LIBRARY)

6.9 Performing the Consistency Check

We recommend that you check the consistency of the newly installed SAP ABAP system. When logging on to the system for the first time, you need to trigger a consistency check manually. The function is then called automatically whenever you start the system or an application server.

Prerequisites

● If the installation finished successfully, your SAP system should be up and running. Otherwise, start it as described in Starting and Stopping SAP System Instances [page 156].

● You have logged on to the SAP system [page 112].

Context

The following checks are performed:

● Completeness of installation● Version compatibility between the SAP release and the operating system

The initial consistency check determines whether:○ The release number in the SAP kernel matches the release number defined in the database system○ The character set specified in the SAP kernel matches the character set specified in the database

system○ Critical structure definitions that are defined in both the data dictionary and the SAP kernel are

identical. The structures checked by this function include SYST, T100, TSTC, TDCT and TFDIR.● Accessibility of the message server● Availability of all work process types● Information about the enqueue server and the update service

Procedure

1. Perform a system check:

Call transaction SICK.

You should see the entry SAP System Check | no errors reported

118 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 119: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

2. Perform a database check:

In the DBA Cockpit (transaction DBACOCKPIT), check for missing tables or indexes by choosing Diagnostics Missing Tables and Indexes .

6.10 Setting Up a Secondary Host for IASP Switchover

Use

When creating a central system using the IASP installation, your new system can be part of a switchable environment if your IASP is configured correctly. Providing that the installation was done using switchable IASP and a virtual hostname and complemented with the cluster services available, you can set up the secondary host to take over the SAP system already installed in a primary host. The secondary host acts as a passive host that can run the SAP system after an IASP failover or switchover. For more information, see SAP Note 568820

.

Procedure

1. Sign on to the systems with a user profile with *ALLOBJ authority, preferably QSECOFR.2. Copy the installed primary host kernel library SAP<SAPSID>IND to the secondary host and then add the

library to the library list using the command ADDLIBLE. The kernel libraries always reside in the system ASP.

3. Depending on the user concept of the installed system, set the environment variable CLASSICUSERCONCEPT accordingly. For more information, see SAP Note 1045022 .

4. Make sure that the UIDs and GIDs match for all user profiles for the SAP system on the primary and secondary hosts. You can use the IBM Systems Director Navigator for i and your clustering software.

CautionYou must make sure the users are set up before continuing.

5. Create a new SAP system with the same SID as the original system using the following command:CRTR3SYS SID(<SAPSID>) INLPGMLIB(SAP<SAPSID>IND)

6. Create new SAP instances with the same instance numbers as the original system using the following:○ CRTR3INST SID(<SAPSID>) INST(<Instance_Number>) ROLE(*CENTRAL)○ CRTR3INST SID(<SAPSID>) INST(<SCS_Instance_Number>) ROLE(*SCS)○ CRTSAPUSR USER(*J2EEDB) SID(<SAPSID>)

7. After creating the new SAP system on the secondary host, the SAP user profile passwords on the primary and secondary hosts may not be identical. If this is the case, change the passwords on the secondary host to match the passwords on the primary host.

8. If the library exists, delete the J2EE library using the following command:DLTLIB LIB(SAPJ2EE<Instance_Number>)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 119

Page 120: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

9. Create IFS symbolic links, modify job descriptions, user profiles, and data areas using the following command:CFGSAP2HO SID(<SAPSID>) IASPP(<Primary_Independent_ASP>) VHOST(<Virtual_Host>)

10. Switch the independent ASP to the secondary host.11. Start the SAP system on the secondary host.

6.11 Setting Up the Transport Directory

Use

You need to set up the transport directory for your SAP system.

Prerequisites

If you have several SAP systems, it depends on your security requirements whether you want them to share a transport directory or whether you use separate directories. For more information, see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System Change and Transport System – Overview Basics of the Change and Transport SystemTransport Management System – Concept

Using a shared system transport directory /usr/sap/trans makes it easier to maintain your SAP system and instance configuration data. We recommend that you link /usr/sap/trans to the IFS directory /sapmnt/trans on the central instance host of an SAP system.

If the central instance is on a different host, the directory should be linked using QFileSvr.400.

You must make sure the /QFileSvr.400/<SAPTRANSHOST> directory is always available after an initial program load (IPL). For more information, see Adjusting Startup Program QSTRUP [page 67].

By default, the installation creates the directory /usr/sap/trans if it did not exist before. Otherwise, installer reuses /usr/sap/trans. When the transport directory is newly created by installer it is a normal directory. You should move this directory to /sapmnt after you successfully finished the installation and you should create a link /usr/sap/trans pointing to /sapmnt/trans.

120 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 121: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

To move the newly created directory /usr/SAP/trans to /sapmnt and to create a link /usr/SAP/trans to /sapmnt/trans, proceed as follows:

1. Log on to the IBM i host as a user with administration rights similar to QSECOFR.2. To move the directory trans enter the following command:

MOV OBJ('/usr/sap/trans') TOOBJ('/sapmnt')3. To create a link pointing to /sapmnt/trans enter the following command:

ADDLNK OBJ('/sapmnt/trans') NEWLNK('/usr/sap/trans')

If you want the directory /usr/sap/trans to point to any other host, you have to change it manually using the following command: CHGR3SHLOC

To change the /usr/sap/trans to /sapmnt/trans of any other host, proceed as follows:

1. Log on to the IBM i host as a user with administrator rights similar to QSECOFR.2. To link to another host enter the following command:

CHGR3SHLOC NEWHOST(<SAPTRANSHOST>)3. Since the command CHGR3SHLOC creates a link using QFileSvr.400 to point to the SAPTRANSHOST, you

must make sure the /QFileSvr.400/<SAPTRANSHOST> directory is always available after an initial program load (IPL).For more information, see Adjusting Startup Program QSTRUP [page 67].

4. To create the missing users on the remote host, see SAP Note 1123501 .

6.12 Configuring the Change and Transport System

You must perform some steps in the Transport Management System to be able to use the Change and Transport System.

Procedure

1. Call transaction STMS in the ABAP system to configure the Change and Transport System. For more information, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help Key Areas of SAP NetWeaver Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System Change and Transport System – Overview Basics of the Change and Transport System Transport Management System – Concept

2. In addition, you must configure the system change options. For more information, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help Key Areas of SAP NetWeaver Solution Life Cycle

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 121

Page 122: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Management by Key Capability Software Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System Transport Organizer (BC-CTS-ORG) Requirements for Working with the Transport Organizer Setting the System Change Option

3. Call transaction SE38 to schedule a dispatcher job for transport programs by executing program RDDIMPDP.

You schedule the transport dispatcher in the current client. This is equivalent to the execution of job RDDNEWPP in transaction SE38.

6.13 Connecting the System to SAP Solution Manager

Here you find information about how to connect your newly installed SAP system to SAP Solution Manager.

Prerequisites

An SAP Solution Manager system must be available in your system landscape. For more information, see http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager .

Context

SAP Solution Manager gives you central access to tools, methods, and preconfigured content that you can use to evaluate and implement your solutions.

When your implementation is running, you can use SAP Solution Manager to manage, monitor, and update systems and business processes in your solution landscape, and also to set up and operate your own solution support.

Procedure

You connect a technical system to SAP Solution Manager by the following steps:1. On the technical systems of your landscape, data suppliers are implemented, for example, with

transaction RZ70 for Application Server ABAP and with Visual Administrator for Application Server Java.

For more information, see the SAP Solution Manager Application Help:

○ If your SAP Solution Manager release is 7.1:http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager Version 7.1 SPS <No> Application Help (English) SAP Solution Manager Operations Managing System Landscape Information Managing Technical System Information Register Technical Systems Automatically by Data Suppliers

122 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 123: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

○ If your SAP Solution Manager release is 7.2:http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager Version 7.2 SPS <No> Application Help (English)Technical Infrastructures Landscape Management Database (LMDB) Managing Technical System Information Registering Technical Systems Automatically by Data Suppliers

2. The data suppliers send information about the hardware and installed software to a central System Landscape Directory (SLD). Updates are sent to the SLD as well.For more information, see the Planning Guide - System Landscape Directory in the SAP Community Network at System Landscape Directory (SLD) - Overview

3. From the SLD, this information is regularly synchronized with SAP Solution Manager where it is managed in the Landscape Management Database (LMDB).

For more information, see the SAP Solution Manager Application Help:

○ If your SAP Solution Manager release is 7.1:http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager Version 7.1 SPS <No> Application Help (English) SAP Solution Manager Operations Managing System Landscape Information Setting Up the Landscape Management Infrastructure Connecting LMDB to System Landscape Directory (SLD)

○ If your SAP Solution Manager release is 7.2:http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager Version 7.2 SPS <No> Application Help (English)Technical Infrastructures Landscape Management Database (LMDB) Setting Up the Landscape Management Infrastructure Connecting LMDB to System Landscape Directory (SLD)

4. In the LMDB, you complete the information from the SLD manually.

For more information, see the SAP Solution Manager Application Help:

○ If your SAP Solution Manager release is 7.1:Managing Technical System Information and Managing Product System Information at http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager Version 7.1 SPS <No> Application Help (English) SAP Solution Manager Operations Managing System Landscape Information

○ If your SAP Solution Manager release is 7.2:http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager Version 7.2 SPS <No> Application Help (English)Technical Infrastructures Landscape Management Database (LMDB) Managing Technical System Information

Next Steps

For more information, see the following pages in the SAP Community Network:

● System Landscape Directory (SLD) - Overview● Documentation for Landscape Management Database - LMDB

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 123

Page 124: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6.14 Applying the Latest Kernel and Support Package Stacks

We strongly recommend that you apply the latest kernel and Support Package stacks before you start configuring your SAP system.

Procedure

● Download and apply the latest Kernel and Support Package stacks using the Software Update Manager (SUM) as described in the documentation Updating SAP Systems Using Software Update Manager 1.0 SP<Number> available at http://support.sap.com/sltoolset System Maintenance Software Update Manager (SUM) 1.0 SP <Latest Version> Guides for SUM 1.0 SP <Latest Version>

● If you want to update the kernel manually, proceed as described below:a. Log on as user <SAPSID>ADM to the hosts of the SAP system instances to be updated.b. Download the latest kernel for your operating system and database platform as described in SAP Note

19466 .c. Apply the SAR files of the kernel Support Packages of the target SP level to a temporary directory using

the command APYSIDKRN. For more information, see SAP Note 1632755 .

6.15 Performing Post-Installation Steps for the Application Server ABAP

This section describes the post-installation steps you have to perform for the ABAP application server.

Prerequisites

You have logged on to the application server ABAP as described in Logging On to the Application Server [page 112].

Context

You have to perform the following post-installation steps for the application server ABAP:

● Upload and set system profiles using transaction RZ10● Create logon and RFC server groups using transactions SMLG and RZ12

124 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 125: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● Create operation modes using transaction RZ04● Schedule standard jobs using transaction SM36● Configuration of SLD data supplier using transaction RZ70● Perform load generation using transaction SGEN

For more information, see the appropriate sections below.

Procedure

● Upload and Set System Profiles using Transaction RZ10

You upload system profiles, such as default profile and instance profile, from the file system into the database of the target system using transaction RZ10.

For more information about how to maintain SAP system profiles, see the SAP Library at:

SAP Release and SAP Library Quick Link SAP Library Path (Continued)

○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP2http://help.sap.com/nw702

○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP1http://help.sap.com/nw701

○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0http://help.sap.com/nw70

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability

System Management Configuration Profiles

Maintaining Profiles

● Create Logon and RFC Server Groups using Transactions SMLG and RZ12

You create the following:

○ Logon groups using transaction SMLG○ RFC server groups using transaction RZ12

Specify the following:

○ Name of the logon or RFC server group○ Instance name (application server)○ Group type attributes are optional

If required, you create the RFC server group parallel_generators.● Create Operation Modes using Transaction RZ04

You check for existing operation modes and - if required - create a new operation mode using transaction RZ04.

Specify the following:

○ Name of the operation mode○ Short description○ Optional: monitoring properties variant

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 125

Page 126: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Select the corresponding checkbox to assign the operation mode to the following:

○ Time table (assignment only from 0-24 h)○ Current application server instance

● Schedule Standard Jobs using Transaction SM36

You schedule SAP standard jobs using transaction SM36.

If a standard job is already scheduled, it is kept. Only missing jobs are scheduled.● Configuration of SLD Data Supplier using Transaction RZ70

a. Make sure that the SLD and the SLD bridge (the receiving thread of the SLD, which runs on a J2EE engine) are running.

b. Configure the System Landscape Directory (SLD) data supplier with default settings, using transaction RZ70.

● Perform Load Generation using Transaction SGEN

You generate the ABAP loads using transaction SGEN. ABAP loads are platform-dependent programs that are generated during runtime and stored in database tables. Using transaction SGEN you can generate ABAP loads of a number of programs, function groups, classes, and so on.

Choose one of the following generation modes:

○ Generate All ObjectsAll existing objects of all software components are generated synchronously. Job RSPARGENER8M starts the generation directly after all ABAP objects have been prepared for generation and have been stored in table GENSETC. Be aware that this is a time-consuming process.

NoteMake sure that you have sufficient space available on your database. The generation of all existing objects requires around 2 - 9 GB of free space.

○ Prepare All Objects for GenerationAll objects to be generated are prepared for generation and stored in table GENSETM. You can start the generation of these objects later with transaction SGEN. Choose this strategy if object generation is to be done outside the configuration task due to performance issues.

6.16 Installing Additional Languages and Performing Language Transport

This section tells you how to install and transport additional languages.

Context

If you have problems during the language installation, see SAP Note 2456868 .

126 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 127: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

1. Configure the language settings by using transaction I18N and choosing I18N Customizing I18N System Configuration or by executing report RSCPINST directly. For more information, see SAP Note 42305 .

For more information, see SAP Note 423052. Perform the language transport using transaction SMLT:

NoteGerman is already available in the system. Do not transport it via SMLT.

a. Classify the language.b. Schedule the language transport.c. Schedule the language supplementation.

Next Steps

NoteYou can also install additional languages later, but if you install any Support Packages in the meantime, you have to do one of the following:

● Install the Support Packages again.● Use the report RSTLAN_IMPORT_OCS to extract the language-relevant information from each Support

Package.

For more information about how to transport an additional language, see http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System Language Transport (BC-CTS-LAN) .

6.17 Configuring User Management

During the installation, the User Management Engine (UME) of your SAP system was configured to use AS ABAP as data source (see SAP System Parameters [page 36]). However, you can still change the data source of the UME to a directory service.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 127

Page 128: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

For more information about changing the data source after installation and about related restrictions, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Identity Management User Management of the Application Server Java Configuring User Management UME Data Sources

6.18 Ensuring User Security

You need to ensure the security of the users that the installer created during the installation.

The tables below at the end of this section list these users:

● Operating system users● SAP system users● Users for SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (PI)

During the installation, the installer by default assigned the master password to all users created during the installation unless you specified other passwords.

If you change user passwords, be aware that SAP system users might exist in multiple SAP system clients (for example, if a user was copied as part of the client copy). Therefore, you need to change the passwords in all the relevant SAP system clients.

RecommendationUser ID and password are encoded only when transported across the network. Therefore, we recommend using encryption at the network layer, either by using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol for HTTP connections or Secure Network Communications (SNC) for the SAP protocols dialog and RFC.

For more information, see:

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security

CautionMake sure that you perform this procedure before the newly installed SAP system goes into production. For security reasons, you also need to copy the installation directory to a separate, secure location – such as a separate storage medium – and then delete the installation directory.

For more information, see Removing the SAPinst Installation Files [page 137].

For the users listed below, take the precautions described in the relevant SAP security guide.

You can find the security guide in the Security section of the product page for your SAP product at http://help.sap.com.

128 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 129: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Example

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Including Enhancement Package 2Security SAP NetWeaver Security Guide

CHGPWD or To change passwords at the operating system level, use the command CHGUSRPRF.

Operating System and Database Users

After the installation, operating system users for SAP system, databaset, and SAP Host Agent are available as listed in the following table:

RecommendationFor security reasons, we recommend that you remove the group SAPINST from the operating system users after you have completed the installation of your SAP system.

You do not have to do this if you specified this “cleanup” already during the Define Parameters phase on the Cleanup Operating System Users screen. Then the removal had already been done automatically when the processing of the installer had completed. For more information, see Operating System Users in SAP System Parameters [page 36].

Changing Passwords of Created IBM i Users

User Profile Initial Password

<SAPSID>ADM –

SAP<SAPSID>DB –

CautionIn three-tier systems, these users must have the same password on all IBM i hosts.

SAP Host Agent User

User User Name Comment

Operating system user sapadm SAP system administrator

You do not need to change the password of this user after the installation.

This user is for administration purposes only.

On IBM i, you are not able to log on as sapadm as this user profile does not allow it.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 129

Page 130: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

SAP System Users

After the installation, ABAP and Java system users are available. The following table shows these users together with recommendations on how you can ensure the security of these users:

ABAP and Java Users

User User Name Comment

SAP system user SAP* This user exists in at least clients 000, 001, and 066 of the ABAP system.

RecommendationWe recommend that you use strong password and auditing policies for this user.

DDIC This user exists in at least clients 000, 001, and 066 of the ABAP system.

RecommendationWe recommend that you use strong password and auditing policies for this user.

EARLYWATCH This user exists in at least client 066 of the ABAP sys­tem.

SAPCPIC This user exists in at least clients 000 and 001 of the ABAP system

Administrator The name that you gave this user during the installation or the de­fault name J2EE_ADMIN

This user exists in at least clients 000 and 001 of the ABAP system and in the User Management Engine (UME) of the Java system. It has administrative per­missions for user management.

RecommendationWe recommend that you use strong password and auditing policies for this user.

Guest The name that you gave this user during the installation or the de­fault name J2EE_GUEST

This user exists in at least clients 000 and 001 of the ABAP system and in the User Management Engine (UME) of the Java system. It is used for anonymous access.

130 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 131: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

User User Name Comment

Communication user for the J2EE Engine

The name that you gave this user during the installation or the de­fault name SAPJSF

This user exists in at least clients 000 and 001 of the ABAP system and in the User Management Engine (UME) of the Java system. It is used for a remote function call (RFC) between the ABAP system and the Java system.

SDM SDM This user is used to access the Software Deployment Manager (SDM) in the Java system.

Users for Adobe Document Services (ADS)

ADSUser This user exists in at least clients 000 and 001 of the ABAP system and in the User Management Engine (UME) of the Java system. It is used for basic authen­tication.

ADS_AGENT This user exists in at least clients 000 and 001 of the ABAP system and in the User Management Engine (UME) of the Java system. It is used for processing forms between an ABAP and a Java environment.

Data supplier user for System Landscape Directory (SLD)

(optional)

The name that you gave this user during the installation

The recommended name is SLDDSUSER.

This user exists in at least clients 000 and 001 of the ABAP system and in the User Management Engine (UME) of the Java system.

NoteThe installer created this user automatically if you chose Configure local SLD during the Define Parameters phase.

ABAP API user for System Land­scape Directory (SLD)

(optional)

The name that you gave this user during the installation

The recommended name is SLDAPIUSER.

This user exists in at least clients 000 and 001 of the ABAP system and in the User Management Engine (UME) of the Java system.

NoteThe installer created this user automatically if you chose Configure local SLD during the Define Parameters phase.

Users for SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (PI)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 131

Page 132: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

If you chose installation option SAP NetWeaver Process Integration during the installation, users for SAP NetWeaver Process Integration are available after the installation as listed in the following table:

User User Name Comment

Integration Repository Service User

The name that you gave this user during the installation or the de­fault name PIREPUSER

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionDo not log on with this user. It is used by the sys­tem for internal communication.

Integration Directory Service User

The name that you gave this user during the installation or the de­fault name PIDIRUSER

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionDo not log on with this user. It is used by the sys­tem for internal communication.

Landscape Directory Service User

The name that you gave this user during the installation or the de­fault name PILDUSER

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionDo not log on with this user. It is used by the sys­tem for internal communication.

Integration Server Application User

The name you gave this user dur­ing the installation or the default name PIAPPLUSER

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

Runtime Workbench Service User

The name that you gave this user during the installation or the de­fault name PIRWBUSER

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionDo not log on with this user. It is used by the sys­tem for internal communication.

Adapter Framework Server Serv­ice User

The name that you gave this user during the installation or the de­fault name PIAFUSER

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionDo not log on with this user. It is used by the sys­tem for internal communication.

132 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 133: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

User User Name Comment

Integration Server Service User The name that you gave this user during installation or the default name PIISUSER

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionDo not log on with this user. It is used by the sys­tem for internal communication.

Management Server Service User

The name that you gave this user during installation or the default name PILSADMIN

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionDo not log on with this user. It is used by the sys­tem for internal communication.

Exchange Infrastructure Admin­istrator

The name that you gave this user during installation or the default name PISUPER

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionThis user has extensive authorizations. Make sure that you assign a secure password.

Exchange Infrastructure Com­municator

The name that you gave this user during installation or the default name PI_JCD_RFC

This user exists in SAP system client 001.

CautionDo not log on with this user. It is used by the sys­tem for internal communication.

More Information

● For more information about managing ABAP users, see:http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Identity Management User and Role Administration of AS ABAP

● For more information about managing Java users, see:http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Identity Management User Management of the Application Server Java

● For more information about Java administration tools for user maintenance, see:http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platforms SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability Java Technology Administration Manual J2EE Engine J2EE Engine Administration Tools

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 133

Page 134: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6.19 Running the Configuration Wizard

This section provides information about how to run the configuration wizard for the SAP NetWeaver usage types.

CautionYou can run the configuration wizard only once and only directly after you installed and patched your SAP system.

You cannot use the configuration wizard after:

● Upgrade● Installation of additional usage types in an existing SAP system● System copy

In these cases, you need to manually perform the corresponding configuration steps.

BI Java only: This does not apply to configuration tasks for BI Java. For more information about BI Java, see SAP Note 917950 . We recommend that you check the configuration of BI Java using SAP Note 937697

.

To configure an SAP NetWeaver usage type, proceed as described in the SAP Library at:

SAP Release and SAP Library Quick Link SAP Library Path (Continued)

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP2http://help.sap.com/nw702

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP1http://help.sap.com/nw701

Configuration Technology Consultant's Guide

Configuration Wizard

SAP NetWeaver 7.0

http://help.sap.com/nw70

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability SAP

NetWeaver Configuration Configuration Wizard

More Information

● If you have SAP Solution Manager 7.1, see the configuration structure of your implementation project in SAP Solution Manager.

● SAP Note 923359 Collective Note: Configuration Wizard – Template Installer

134 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 135: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6.20 Production Client Considerations

A client is a self-contained unit in an SAP system with separate master records and its own set of tables.The installer creates three ABAP clients during the installation, client 000, client 001, and client 066. This section describes how you can use a client other than the default client 001 as your production client.

Prerequisites

You have installed the dual-stack (ABAP+Java) system as described in this documentation.

Context

You can choose one of the following methods to set up your new production client:

● You install a dual-stack (ABAP+Java) system and reconnect the Java part.● You install a dual-stack (ABAP+Java) system and do not reconnect the Java part.

The following procedure describes the above methods.

Procedure

● Installing a Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) System and Reconnecting the Java Part

If you need the Java users in your ABAP production client, you have to manually configure the connection of the Java part to the ABAP part.

For more information about Java users, see SAP System Parameters [page 36].

○ If you have installed a Process Integration (PI) system, proceed as described in SAP Note 940309 .○ If you have installed a Mobile Infrastructure (MI) system, proceed as follows:

1. Configure the Mobile Infrastructure system. For more information, seehttp://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Configuration Technology Consultant's Guide Mobilizing Business Processes .

2. You perform the client copy [page 136].3. You reconnect the Java part to the production client as described in the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability SecurityIdentity Management User Management of the Application Server Java Configuring User Management UME Data Sources User Management of Application Server ABAP as Data Source

Changing the ABAP Client for the UME After a Client Copy

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 135

Page 136: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● Installing a Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) System Without Reconnecting the Java Part

If you do not need the Java users in your ABAP production client, there is no need to manually configure the connection of the Java part to the ABAP part.

For more information about Java users, see SAP System Parameters [page 36].

1. You install the ABAP+Java system as described in this documentation.2. You perform the client copy [page 136].

6.21 Performing the Client Copy

To get a production client, you have to perform a copy of the SAP reference client.

Context

The installer creates three ABAP clients during the installation, client 000, client 001, and client 066.

Client 000 is the SAP reference client for ABAP.

If you chose to install a dual-stack (ABAP+Java) system in one installation run, AS Java was configured against client 001 during the installation.

Your production client must be a copy of the SAP reference client 000. For more information, see Production Client Considerations [page 135]

Caution

For client copy considerations for SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (PI), see SAP Note 940309 .

Make sure you use the SAP_UCUS profile. Do not use the profile SAP_CUST as stated in the SAP Library documentation . After the client copy, you must logon to your J2EE Engine and change the parameter ume.r3.connection.master.client to the new PI client.

Procedure

1. Maintain the new client with transaction SCC4.

2. Activate kernel user SAP*:

a. Set the profile parameter login/no_automatic_user_sapstar to 0.b. Restart the application server.

3. Log on to the new client with kernel user SAP* and password PASS.

4. Copy the client with transaction SCCL and profile SAP_CUST.

5. Check the log files with transaction SCC3.

136 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 137: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6. Create the required users. These users must have at least the authorizations required for user administration and system administration. Create a user SAP* with all required authorizations for this user. If you want to have other users for system administration, you can also create user SAP* without authorizations.

7. Deactivate kernel user SAP*:

a. Reset login/no_automatic_user_sapstar to 1.b. Restart the application server.

Next Steps

For more information about the client copy and about how to perform it, see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement_Package>Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key CapabilitySoftware Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System BC - Client Copy and Transport (BC-CTS-CCO)

6.22 Removing the Installation Files of the Installer

You use this procedure to gain disk space after the installation by deleting the installation files of the installer.

On the IBM i host, you should remove the installation directory, the temporary installer files, and the copied installation media.

NoteYou might want to disconnect from the installation share and remove it from the IBM i. However, you need for J2EE some Java tools with a GUI running on Windows, for example the VisualAdmin and ConfigTool. These tools have to use a share such as the installation share. For this you might want to keep the share.

CautionDo not use this procedure until all instances of the SAP system on the IBM i host have been installed.

Prerequisites

● You have completed the SAP system installation.● The SAP system is up and running.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 137

Page 138: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

CautionOnly delete the log files if you are sure that you do not need them again. Do not delete log files other than those in the paths given here.

On IBM i:

1. If you want to remove the installer installation directory, enter the following command:RMVDIR DIR('<Installation_Directory>') SUBTREE(*ALL)

2. To remove temporary SAPINST files, enter the following command:RMVDIR DIR('/tmp/sapinst_exe*') SUBTREE(*ALL)

NoteIf you have chosen one of the three variables: TEMP, TMP, or TMPDIR for your temporary directory in section Useful Information About the Installer [page 102], you must use this temporary directory instead of '/tmp'.

3. To remove the installation media, enter the following command:RMVDIR DIR('/tmp/sap/<SAPSID>') SUBTREE(*ALL)

To disconnect the share to the IBM i host on the Windows host, enter the following command:

net use <Mapped_Drive>: /DELETE

6.23 Performing a Full Backup

Use

You can use this procedure to make a full backup of your SAP system.

NoteDuring the backup, your SAP system is unavailable to other users.

Procedure

1. On the IBM i command line, enter GO SAVE.2. Enter option 21.

For more information, see the IBM documentation IBM i Backing Up Your System in the IBM Knowledge Center.

138 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 139: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

More Information

Restoring a Backup [page 174]

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 139

Page 140: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

6.24 Logging on to the SAP Web Dispatcher Management Console

This section describes how to log on to the SAP Web Dispatcher.

Context

NoteThis step is only required if you chose to install an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher instance within the ASCS instance.

You must log on to the SAP Web Dispatcher Management Console to do the following:

● Check whether the SAP Web Dispatcher was installed successfully,● Change the password of the webadm user,● Access monitoring and administration tools.

Procedure

1. Open a web browser.2. Enter the following URL, depending on whether you use HTTP or HTTPS:

http(s)://<Webdispatcher_Host>:<HTTP(S)_PORT>/sap/wdisp/admin

Examplehttps://plx282:44300/sap/wdisp/admin

3. Log on as user webadm with the password that you entered during the input phase of the installation.

The SAP Web Dispatcher Monitor screen appears.4. We recommend that you change the password of webadm immediately after the installation for security

reasons.

140 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 141: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

For more information on how to change passwords of existing users using the Admin Handler, see SAP Library at:

SAP Release and SAP Library Quick Link SAP Library Path (Continued)

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP3

http://help.sap.com/nw703

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide

Services SAP Web Dispatcher Administration of the

SAP Web Dispatcher Using the Web Administration

Interface Area menu Section “HTTP Handler”

○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP2http://help.sap.com/nw702

○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP1http://help.sap.com/nw701

○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0http://help.sap.com/nw70

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability

System Management SAP Web Dispatcher

Administration of the SAP Web Dispatcher Using the

Web Administration Interface Area menu Section

“HTTP Handler”

Related Information

ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20]

6.25 SAP Web Dispatcher Configuration

After installing SAP Web Dispatcher, you must configure it to be able to use it.

NoteThis step is only required if you chose to install an integrated SAP Web Dispatcher instance within the ASCS instance.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iPost-Installation P U B L I C 141

Page 142: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

For more information, see the Web Dispatcher documentation in SAP Library at:

SAP Release and SAP Library Quick Link SAP Library Path (Continued)

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP3

http://help.sap.com/nw703

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key

Capability Application Platform by Key

Capability Platform-Wide Services SAP Web

Dispatcher

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP2http://help.sap.com/nw702

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP1http://help.sap.com/nw701

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0http://help.sap.com/nw70

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key

Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by

Key Capability System Management SAP

Web Dispatcher

http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver Platform SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Application Help Key Areas of SAP NetWeaver Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management SAP Web Dispatcher

Related Information

ASCS Instance with Integrated SAP Web Dispatcher [page 20]

142 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Post-Installation

Page 143: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7 Additional Information

The following sections provide additional information about optional preparation, installation, and post-installation tasks.

There is also a section describing how to delete an SAP system.

7.1 Integration of LDAP Directory Services

This section explains the benefits of using the SAP system with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) directory and gives an overview of the configuration steps required to use an SAP system with the directory.

LDAP defines a standard protocol for accessing directory services, which is supported by various directory products such as Microsoft Active Directory, and OpenLDAP slapd. Using directory services enables important information in a corporate network to be stored centrally on a server. The advantage of storing information centrally for the entire network is that you only have to maintain data once, which avoids redundancy and inconsistency.

If an LDAP directory is available in your corporate network, you can configure the SAP system to use this feature. For example, a correctly configured SAP system can read information from the directory and also store information there.

NoteThe SAP system can interact with the Active Directory using the LDAP protocol, which defines:

● The communication protocol between the SAP system and the directory● How data in the directory is structured, accessed, or modified

If a directory other than the Active Directory also supports the LDAP protocol, the SAP system can take advantage of the information stored there. For example, if there is an LDAP directory on a UNIX or Windows server, you can configure the SAP system to use the information available there. In the following text, directories other than the Active Directory that implement the LDAP protocol are called generic LDAP directories.

This section does not provide information about the use of LDAP directories with the LDAP Connector. For more information about using and configuring the LDAP Connector for an ABAP system, see SAP Help Portal at:

https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Identity Management User and Role Administration of AS ABAP Configuration of User and Role Administration Directory ServicesLDAP Connector

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 143

Page 144: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Prerequisites

You can only configure the SAP system for Active Directory services or other LDAP directories if these are already available on the network. As of Windows 2000 or higher, the Active Directory is automatically available on all domain controllers. A generic LDAP directory is an additional component that you have to install separately on a UNIX or Windows server.

Features

In the SAP environment, you can exploit the information stored in an Active Directory or generic LDAP directory by using:

● SAP Logon● The SAP Microsoft Management Console (SAP MMC)

For more information about the automatic registration of SAP components in LDAP directories and the benefits of using it in SAP Logon and SAP MMC, see the documentation SAP System Information in Directory Services at:https://archive.sap.com/documents/docs/DOC-14384

● The SAP Management Console (SAP MC)

SAP Logon

Instead of using a fixed list of systems and message servers, you can configure the SAP Logon in the sapmsg.ini configuration file to find SAP systems and their message servers from the directory. If you configure SAP logon to use the LDAP directory, it queries the directory each time Server or Group selection is chosen to fetch up-to-date information on available SAP systems.

To use LDAP operation mode, check that the sapmsg.ini file contains the following:

[Address]

Mode=LDAPdirectory

LDAPserver=

LDAPnode=

LDAPoptions=

Distinguish the following cases:

● If you use an Active Directory, you must set LDAPoptions=“DirType=NT5ADS”. For more information, see the SAP system profile parameter ldap/options.

● You must specify the directory servers (for example, LDAPserver=pcintel6 p24709) if one of the following is true:○ The client is not located in the same domain forest as the Active Directory○ The operating system does not have a directory service client (Windows NT and Windows 9X without

installed dsclient).For more information, see the SAP system profile parameter ldap/servers.

● For other directory services, you can use LDAPnode to specify the distinguished name of the SAP root node. For more information, see the SAP system profile parameter ldap/saproot.

144 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 145: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

SAP MMC

The SAP MMC is a graphical user interface (GUI) for administering and monitoring SAP systems from a central location. It is automatically set up when you install an SAP system on Windows. If the SAP system has been prepared correctly, the SAP MMC presents and analyzes system information that it gathers from various sources, including the Active Directory.

Integrating the Active Directory as a source of information has advantages for the SAP MMC. It can read system information straight from the directory that automatically registers changes to the system landscape. As a result, up-to-date information about all SAP application servers, their status, and parameter settings is always available in the SAP MMC.

If you need to administer distributed systems, we especially recommend that you use the SAP MMC together with Active Directory services. You can keep track of significant events in all of the systems from a single SAP MMC interface. You do not need to manually register changes in the system configuration. Instead, such changes are automatically updated in the directory and subsequently reflected in the SAP MMC.

If your SAP system is part of a heterogeneous SAP system landscape that comprises systems or instances both on UNIX and Windows operating systems, you can also use the SAP MMC for operating and monitoring the instances running on UNIX.

SAP MC

The SAP MC is a graphical user interface (GUI) for administering and monitoring SAP systems from a central location. If the SAP system has been prepared correctly, the SAP MC presents and analyzes system information that it gathers from various sources, including generic LDAP Directory.

Integrating a generic LDAP Directory as a source of information has advantages for the SAP MC. It can read system information straight from the directory that automatically registers changes to the system landscape. As a result, up-to-date information about all SAP application servers, their status, and parameter settings is always available in the SAP MC.

For more information about the SAP MC and about how to configure it to access LDAP directories, see the documentation SAP Management Console at the following locations:

Release Path on SAP Help Portal

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package

1● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package

2

http://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER SAP

NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package>

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Java Technology

Administration Manual J2EE Engine J2EE Engine

Administration Tools SAP Management Console

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 3 https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER_703

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability SAP

Management Console

Configuration Tasks for LDAP Directories

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 145

Page 146: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

This section describes the configuration tasks for the Active Directory or other (generic) LDAP directories.

Configuration Tasks for Active Directory

To enable an SAP system to use the features offered by the Active Directory, you have to configure the Active Directory so that it can store SAP system data.

To prepare the directory, you use the installer to automatically:

● Extend the Active Directory schema to include the SAP-specific data types● Create the domain accounts required to enable the SAP system to access and modify the Active Directory.

These are the group SAP_LDAP and the user sapldap.● Create the root container where information related to SAP is stored● Control access to the container for SAP data by giving members of the SAP_LDAP group permission to

read and write to the directory

You do this by running the installer on the Windows server where you want to use Active Directory Services and choosing <Product> Software Life-Cycle Options LDAP Registration Active Directory Configuration . For more information about running the installer on Windows, see the documentation Installation Guide - Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver <Release> on Windows: <Database> at http://support.sap.com/sltoolset System ProvisioningInstallation Option .

NoteYou have to configure the directory server only once. Then all SAP systems that need to register in this directory server can use this setup.

Configuration Tasks for Generic LDAP Directories

To configure other LDAP directories, refer to the documentation of your directory vendor.

Enabling the SAP System LDAP Registration

Once you have correctly configured your directory server, you can enable the LDAP registration of the SAP system by setting some profile parameters in the default profile.

To do this, run the installer once for your system and choose <Product> Software Life-Cycle OptionsLDAP Registration LDAP Support

If you use a directory server other than Microsoft Active Directory and/or non-Windows application servers, you have to store the directory user and password information by using ldappasswd pf=<Instance_Profile>. The information is encrypted for storage in DIR_GLOBAL and is therefore valid for all application servers. After restarting all application servers and start services, the system is registered in your directory server. The registration protocols of the components are dev_ldap*. The registration is updated every time a component starts.

7.2 Multiple SAP Systems on a Single HostSAP on IBM i allows the installation of multiple SAP systems on a single host (provided space exists). However, we recommend that you isolate your SAP production system as far as possible from your test and development

146 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 147: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

systems. The degree of isolation you opt for can range from running each SAP system on a separate host to having all the environments on a single host.

If you decide to implement multiple SAP systems on a single host, you need to be aware of the risks involved.

Running multiple SAP systems on a single host is similar to MCOD. For more information, see SAP Note 443925 .

Importance of an Independent Testing Environment

If you have both your production and development or test systems on the same host, you cannot test program temporary fixes (PTFs) and cumulative packages (CUM) packages in an independent testing environment. The reason is that this immediately affects the production system.

The same problem applies to operating system upgrades. If upgrades initially take place in an independent test environment, you can identify any customer-specific problems (such as problems resulting from any modifications you might have made to the standard system) separate from the live environment.

If you have more than one SAP system on a single host, you can test SAP upgrades independently. However, if you test an SAP upgrade on a separate host, it has the advantage that a test SAP upgrade does not take away resources from the production system.

Possibilities for Resource Distribution

● LPAR: Logical Partitioning of the HostYou can divide your complete host into several entirely independent servers. This means that you install different copies of the operating system on each of the servers. You can decide on the CPU, memory, and DASD splitting. Only the serial number is the same, and all the other elements are separate and cannot interfere with a system in another LPAR. This is the best (but most expensive) way to separate SAP systems.

● Memory: Running SAP Instances in Separate SubsystemsEach SAP system with its associated database can have multiple instances. Each instance runs in a separate operating system subsystem. (A subsystem is an operating environment in which the system coordinates processing and resources.) The subsystem definition allows you to define and allocate individual memory pools to the subsystem. These memory pools cannot be accessed by users from any other SAP instance.

● Disks: Separate ASPs for Each SAP SystemYou can segment the installed disk capacity to provide a separate auxiliary storage pool (ASP) for each SAP system. You can then allocate specific disk drives to each user ASP created. This helps to minimize the impact of disk activity of one SAP environment on other SAP environments.

● Processors: Long-Running Tasks Can Slow Down the Production EnvironmentRegardless of the number of processors involved, IBM i manages them as a single entity. The operating system dispatches tasks to the processors and balances the workload. A long-running program or other task encountered during development or testing can have an impact on production activity if these SAP systems are running on the same host. You can minimize the potential impact of this by running development and test systems at a lower priority than the production system.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 147

Page 148: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.3 Dialog Instance Installation for an Upgraded System only: Updating Profiles

You only need to perform these steps if you want to install a dialog instance and you have already performed the steps listed under “Prerequisites” in this section.

Prerequisites

1. You upgraded your SAP system from an earlier source release as follows:○ You upgraded your SAP NetWeaver system from an earlier source release to a target release lower

than SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR3.○ You upgraded your SAP ERP system from an earlier source release to a target release lower than SAP

ERP 6.0 SR3.○ You upgraded your SAP CRM system from an earlier source release to a target release lower than SAP

CRM 5.0 SR3.○ You upgraded your SAP SCM system from an earlier source release to a target release lower than SAP

SCM 5.0 SR3.○ You upgraded your SAP SRM system from an earlier source release to a target release lower than SAP

SRM 5.0 SR3.○ You upgraded your SAP Solution Manager system from an earlier source release to a target release

lower than SAP Solution Manager 7.0.2. You installed the current Enhancement Package.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Global host, go to folder /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/profile .

NoteSAP system profiles are named as follows:

Instance profiles: <SAPSID>_<INSTANCE_ID>_<Host_Name>.pfl

Start profiles: START_<INSTANCE_ID>_<Host_Name>.pfl

2. Make sure that the parameter DIR_CT_RUN, if set, has identical values in the instance profile and the start profile of the central instance:

○ If it is set in the instance profile, it must also be set in the start profile.○ If it is not set in the instance profile, it must not be set in the start profile either.

3. Change the default profile DEFAULT.PFL by setting rdisp/msserv_internal to a free port number.

ExampleDEFAULT.PFL

148 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 149: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Before the change:

...

rdisp/msserv = sapms<SAPSID>

...

After the change:

...

rdisp/msserv = sapms<SAPSID>

rdisp/msserv_internal = <Free_Port_Number>

...

4. Change the instance profile of the central services instance for Java (SCS instance) as follows:

a. Set rdisp/msserv to 0.b. Set rdisp/msserv_internal to the port number assigned to rdisp/msserv.

ExampleInstance profile of the SCS instance:

Before the change:

...

rdisp/msserv = 4711

...

After the change:

...

rdisp/msserv = 0

rdisp/msserv_internal = 4711

...

5. Restart all SAP services and instances of your SAP system.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 149

Page 150: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.4 Installing a Central or Distributed System Without the ASCS Instance

If you decided not to follow the standard installation procedure, which implies the installation of an ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance), you have to perform the additional steps described in this section.

Context

If you decided not to follow the standard installation procedure, which implies the installation of an ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance), you have to perform the additional steps described in the following:

● Central system: You first have to prepare the central system host as global host, and then to separately install the database instance and the central instance. In this case, make sure that you follow the specifically marked instructions in the Installation Checklist. [page 90].

● Distributed system: If you do not want to install the ASCS instance, you have to prepare the relevant host as global host instead. In this case, make sure that you follow the specifically marked instructions in the Installation Checklist. [page 90]

Procedure

● Central System

Do not run installation option Central System. Instead, you have to install the required SAP system instances separately on the central system. This means you have to run the installation options for a Distributed System (except for the ASCS instance option) on the central system host as follows:

a. You run the installer [page 98] to prepare the central system host as SAP global host using installation option <Product> Software Life-Cycle Options Additional Preparation Options Global Host Preparation for an ABAP System .This sets up the global directories <sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/exe, <sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/profile, and <sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/global.

b. You run the installer [page 98] on the central system host to install the SCS instance using installation option Distributed System SCS Instance .

c. You run the installer [page 98] on the central system host to install the database instance using installation option Distributed System Database Instance .

d. You run the installer [page 98] on the central system host to install the central instance using installation option Distributed System Central Instance .

● Distributed Systema. Do not run installation option ASCS Instance. Instead, you have to run the installer [page 98] to

prepare the SAP global host using installation option <Product> Software Life-Cycle OptionsAdditional Preparation Options Global Host Preparation for an ABAP System .

150 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 151: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

This sets up the global directories <sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/exe, <sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/profile, and <sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/global.

7.5 Installing the SAP Host Agent Separately

This procedure tells you how to install an SAP Host Agent separately.

Context

The SAP Host Agent is installed automatically during the installation of new SAP instances with SAP kernel 7.20 or higher (integrated installation). This procedure is only for hosts with no SAP Host Agent running on them, due to the following reasons:

● There is no SAP system or instance on the host.● The SAP system or instance running on the host has a kernel release lower than SAP kernel 7.20 and the

host does not yet have an SAP Host Agent.● You have upgraded your SAP system to a release with a kernel release lower than SAP kernel 7.20 and the

host of the upgraded system or instance does not yet have an SAP Host Agent.

SAP Host Agent has the following executable programs and services:

● The SAPHostExec service● The sapstartsrv service SAPHostControl● The operating system collector saposcol● The DB4STATS program and command● The SAP ILE daemon

NoteOn IBM i, the installed programs are started by the auto-start job (ADDAJE)SAPINIT in subsystem QUSRWRK, which was created during the installation. The subsystem QUSRWRK restarts after every initial program load (IPL) automatically.

CautionYou must leave the subsystem QUSRWRK in the program QSTRUP. This is the default. Otherwise, the SAP Host Agent does not work.

The following procedure describes the steps you have to perform on the host where you install the SAP Host Agent separately.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 151

Page 152: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Procedure

1. Check the hardware and software requirements [page 27] on the installation host.2. Set up file systems [page 53] and make sure that the required disk space is available for the directories to

be created during the installation.3. You complete the preparation for IBM i [page 59].4. Make the unpacked Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 archive available on the installation host as

described in Downloading and Extracting the Software Provisioning Manager 1.0 Archive [page 81].5. Make the latest patch level of the SAPHOSTAGENT <Version>.SAR file available on the host where you

want to install the SAP Host Agent.

You can do this in the following ways:

○ Download it from the following path: https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter SUPPORT PACKAGES & PATCHES By Category SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 7.21 <Operating System>

○ Alternatively, you can also copy it from the UC kernel medium (folder K_<Version>_U_<OS>), where “_U_” means Unicode.You can either use the physical UC kernel medium from the installation package of your SAP system, or download the kernel medium from https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/softwarecenter . For more information, see Downloading Installation Media [page 86] .

RecommendationIt is highly recommended that you always choose the highest SP version of the SAPHOSTAGENT<SP-version>.SAR archive.

6. You run the installer [page 98] to install the SAP Host Agent.

On the Welcome screen, choose <Product> Software Life-Cycle Options Additional Preparation Options Host Agent .

7. Check whether the installed services are available as follows:a. Log on as user with administration rights similar to QSECOFR.b. Check whether the following services are available:

○ The control program saphostexec

NoteOn IBM i, check the program using the following command:

WRKJOB JOB(SAPADM/SAPHOSTEXE)

○ The operating system collector saposcol.○ The SAP NetWeaver Management agent SAPHostControl (sapstartsrv in host mode)

NoteOn IBM i, check the program using the following command:

WRKJOB JOB(SAPADM/SAPSTRSRV)

152 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 153: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

NoteThe installed programs are automatically started when the host is booted.

The programs are started by the auto-start job (ADDAJE)SAPINIT in subsystem QUSRWRK, which was created during the installation.

Next Steps

For more information about the SAP Host Agent, see SAP Help Portal at:

Release SAP Help Portal Path

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 1● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 3

https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER SAP

NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package>

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability SAP

Host Agent

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 2 https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER_702

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Solution

Monitoring SAP Host Agent

7.6 Splitting Off an ABAP Central Services Instance from an Existing Central Instance

With the installer option Split Off ASCS Instance from existing Central Instance, you can move the message server and the enqueue work process from an existing central instance to a newly installed ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance). The new ASCS instance is installed while the split is done.

Prerequisites

The existing SAP system of the central instance must meet the following requirements:

● It was upgraded to an SAP system based on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 or higher● It does not yet have an ASCS instance

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 153

Page 154: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Context

Before the SplitThe ABAP stack of the central instance includes:

● ABAP dispatcher and work processes (dialog, batch, spool, enqueue, or update)● Gateway● Internet communication manager (ICM)● Java server processes● Internet graphics service (IGS)● ABAP message server

After the Split The ABAP stack of the central instance now includes:

● ABAP dispatcher and work processes (dialog, batch, spool, or update)● Gateway● Internet communication manager (ICM)● Java server processes● Internet graphics service (IGS)

The newly created ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance) includes:

● ABAP message server● ABAP standalone enqueue server

The ABAP enqueue work process is now replaced with the ABAP standalone enqueue server.

154 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 155: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

The Effect of the Split The following graphic provides an overview of the components contained in the central instance before and after the split, along with the newly created ASCS instance:

Procedure

1. Plan the basic parameters, as described in SAP System Parameters [page 36]:○ Choose an instance number for the ASCS instance to be created.○ Note that the message server port is not changed during the split.

2. Check the hardware and software requirements for the ASCS instance to be created as described in Hardware and Software Requirements [page 27].

3. Specify basic SAP System Parameters [page 36] for the ASCS instance to be created.4. Set up the required file systems [page 53] for the ASCS instance to be created.5. Check the prerequisites [page 96] and start the installer [page 98] on the host where the ASCS instance is

to be created.

6. On the Welcome screen, choose Generic Options Split Off ASCS Instance from Existing Central Instance .

7. Follow the instructions on the installer screens and enter the required parameters.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 155

Page 156: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

NoteTo find more information on each parameter during the Define Parameters phase, position the cursor on the required parameter input field , and choose either F1 or the HELP tab. Then the available help text is displayed in the HELP tab.

After you have entered all requested input parameters, the installer displays the Parameter Summary screen. This screen shows both the parameters that you entered and those that the installer set by default. If required, you can revise the parameters before starting the installation.

8. To start the installation, choose Start.The installer starts the installation and displays the progress of the installation. When the installation has successfully completed, the installer shows the dialog Execution of Split Off ASCS Instance from existing Central Instance has completed.

9. Restart the application server instances [page 156] (central instance and dialog instances if they exist).10. Check whether you can log on to the application servers [page 112].11. Ensure user security [page 128] for the operating system users of the newly created ASCS instance.12. If required, perform an installation backup [page 138].

7.7 Starting and Stopping SAP System Instances

You can start or stop SAP system instances using the SAP Management Console (SAP MC) [page 156].

Apart from using the SAP Management Console (SAP MC) you can also use commands to Start or stop SAP system instances [page 160].

7.7.1 Starting and Stopping SAP System Instances Using the SAP Management Console

You can start and stop all instances of your SAP system using the SAP Management Console (SAP MC)except the database instance.

Prerequisites

● Make sure that the host names defined in the DNS server match the names of the SAP system instance hosts. In particular, keep in mind that host names are case-sensitive. For example, if the names of the SAP system instance hosts are in upper case, but the same host names are defined in the DNS server in lower case, starting and stopping the system does not work.

● If you want to start or restart remote systems or instances, make sure that you have registered them in the SAP Management Console (SAP MC). You do not need to register SAP systems or instances installed on the local host, because the SAP MC displays them automatically.

156 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 157: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● The SAP Host Agent is installed on the host where the application server of the SAP system or instance runs.

● You have installed Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 5.0 or higher.● Your Web browser supports Java.● Your Web browser's Java plug-in is installed and enabled to run scripting of Java applets.

Context

RecommendationIf you experience any issues when starting or using the SAP Management Console, refer to SAP Note 1153713 .

● For more information about handling the SAP Management Console, see:

Release SAP Help Portal Path

○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 1○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package

3

https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVERSAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement

Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key

Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key

Capability SAP Management Console

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 2 https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER_702

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability

Solution Monitoring Monitoring in the CCMS SAP

Management Console

● If your newly installed SAP system is part of a heterogeneous SAP system landscape comprising systems or instances on Windows platforms, you can also start and stop it from a Windows system or instance using the SAP Microsoft Management Console (SAP MMC).

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 157

Page 158: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

For more information about handling the SAP MMC, see the following documentation:

Release SAP Help Portal Path

○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 1○ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package

2

https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVERSAP NetWeaver 7.0 [including Enhancement Package

<Number>] Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key

Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key

Capability Solution Monitoring Monitoring in the

CCMS SAP Microsoft Management Console: Windows

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 3 https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER_703

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability SAP

Microsoft Management Console: Windows

Procedure

● Starting the Web-Based SAP Management Console1. Start a Web browser and enter the following URL:

http://<Host_Name>:5<Instance_Number>13

ExampleIf the instance number is 53 and the host name is saphost06, you enter the following URL:

http://saphost06:55313

This starts the SAP MC Java applet.

NoteIf your browser displays a security warning message, choose the option that indicates that you trust the applet.

2. Choose Start.The SAP Management Console (SAP MC) appears.By default, the instances installed on the host you have connected to are already added in the SAP MC.

NoteIf the instances have not been added or if you want to change the configuration to display systems and instances on other hosts, you have to register your system manually. This is described in Registering Systems and Instances in the SAP Management Console below.

● Starting SAP Systems or Instances

158 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 159: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Similarly, you can start or restart all SAP systems and individual instances registered in the SAP MC.

1. In the navigation pane, open the tree structure and navigate to the system node that you want to start.2. Select the system or instance and choose Start from the context menu.3. In the Start SAP System(s) dialog box, choose the required options.4. Choose OK.

The SAP MC starts the specified system or system instances.

NoteThe system might prompt you for the credentials of the SAP system administrator. To complete the operation, you require administration permissions. Log in as user <sapsid>adm.

Starting SAP System Instances Successively

If you need to start the instances of an SAP system successively – for example when you want to start a distributed or a high-availability system – proceed as follows:

1. Start the database instance.2. Start the ABAP central services instance ASCS<Instance_Number>.3. Start the central services instance SCS<Instance_Number>.4. Start the central instance DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>.5. Start dialog instances D<Instance_Number>, if there are any.

● Stopping SAP Systems or Instances

Similarly, you can stop all SAP systems and individual instances registered in the SAP MC.

1. Select the system or instance you want to stop and choose Stop from the context menu.2. In the Stop SAP System(s) dialog box, choose the required options.3. Choose OK.

The SAP MC stops the specified system or system instances.

NoteThe system might prompt you for the SAP system administrator credentials. To complete the operation, you require administration permissions. Log in as user <sapsid>adm.

Stopping SAP System Instances Successively

If you need to stop the instances of an SAP system successively – for example when you want to start a distributed or a high-availability system – proceed as follows:

1. Stop dialog instances D<Instance_Number>, if there are any.2. Stop the central instance DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>.3. Stop the central services instance SCS<Instance_Number>.4. Stop the ABAP central services instance ASCS<Instance_Number>.5. Stop the database instance.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 159

Page 160: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.7.2 Starting and Stopping SAP System Instances Using Commands

The procedures below explain how to start and stop SAP system instances after the installation.

NoteIf your newly installed system is part of a heterogeneous SAP system landscape comprising systems or instances on Windows platforms, you can also start and stop it from a system or instance on Windows using the Microsoft Management Console (MMC).

For more information about handling the MMC see Starting and Stopping the SAP System in the documentation Installation Guide - Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver <Release> on Windows: <Database> at http://support.sap.com/sltoolset

System Provisioning Installation Option .

Prerequisites

● You have checked the default profile /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/profile/DEFAULT.PFL for parameter login/system client and set the value to the correct production system client. For example, the entry must be login/system_client = 001 if your production client is 001.

● You have checked the settings for Java Virtual Machine parameters as described in SAP Note 723909 .

NoteThe instance name (instance ID) of the central instance is DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>, the instance name of the central services instance is SCS<Instance_Number>, and the instance name of a dialog instance is D<Instance_Number>.

Procedure

Starting the SAP System

1. Log on to your IBM i as user <SAPSID>ADM.2. Check that there are no active jobs for the instance that you have just installed. To do this, proceed as

follows:1. For the central services instance, the central instance and all dialog instances, enter the following

command:WRKACTJOB SBS(SAP<Instance_Number><SAPSID>)

2. If a job is displayed, stop it using the following command:ENDSBS SBS(SAP<Instance_Number><SAPSID>) OPTION(*IMMED)

3. To start the SAP system, enter the following command and press F4 :STARTSAP

160 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 161: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

4. Enter the SAP system ID (for example, C11) and instance number (for example, 90).Repeat this for each instance that you want to start.

RecommendationWe recommend that you retain the default value *ENV for the SAP system ID. *ENV is replaced by the correct value for the SAP system ID.

CautionMake sure that you start the instances in the correct order: At first the central services instance (only exists if you installed an SAP system based on AS ABAP and AS Java), then the central instance and after that all dialog instances.

NoteMake sure that the SAP system and associated Java engines are up and running before you start or restart dialog instances and their Java engines.

5. To check whether your SAP system started successfully for every installed instance, enter the following command:WRKACTJOB SBS(SAP<Instance_Number><SAPSID>)

NoteEvery instance runs in its own subsystem SAP<Instance_Number><SAPSID>.

Stopping the SAP System

1. Log on to your IBM i as <SAPSID>ADM.2. To stop an SAP system, enter the following command and press F4 :

STOPSAP3. Enter the SAP system ID (for example, C11) and instance number (for example, 90).

Repeat this for each instance that you want to stop.

RecommendationWe recommend that you retain the default value *ENV for the SAP system ID. *ENV is replaced by the correct value for the SAP system ID.

NoteStop the instances in the correct order:

At first all dialog instances then the central instance and after that the central services instance (only exists if you installed an SAP system based on AS ABAP and AS Java).

For each stopped instance, the user you used to shut down the system receives a message from the operating system.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 161

Page 162: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.8 Creating a User for LDAP Directory Access

If you use LDAP directory services, you have to set up a user with a password on the host where the SAP system is running. This permits the SAP system to access and modify the LDAP directory.

Prerequisites

During the SAP instance installation you chose to configure the SAP system to integrate LDAP services.

Context

For more information, see Preparing the Active Directory in the Windows installation guide for your SAP system solution and database.

Procedure

1. Log on as user <sapsid>adm.

2. Enter:ldappasswd pf=<Path_and_Name_of_Instance_Profile>

3. Enter the required data.

The following is an example of an entry to create an LDAP Directory User:

CN=sapldap,CN=Users,DC=nt5,DC=sap-ag,DC=de

7.9 Usage Type-Specific Initial Technical Configuration Done by the Installer

The installer automatically performs initial technical configuration steps for the usage types shown below during the installation. However, you might have to perform these steps manually if you want to change existing parameters or you want to set additional parameters.

For more information, see the following usage type-specific sections.

162 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 163: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Related Information

Initial Technical Configuration for SAP NetWeaver Application Server for Java (AS Java) [page 163]Initial Technical Configuration for Process Integration (PI) [page 166]

7.9.1 Initial Technical Configuration for SAP NetWeaver Application Server for Java (AS Java)

The installer automatically performs initial technical configuration steps for some components of SAP NetWeaver Application Server for Java (AS Java). However, you might have to perform some of these steps manually after the installer has finished, depending on your installation scenario.

These are the following components.

Related Information

Initial Technical Configuration for Adobe Document Services [page 163]Initial Technical Configuration for Composite Application Framework Core (CAF) [page 164]Initial Technical Configuration for the System Landscape Directory (SLD) [page 165]

7.9.1.1 Initial Technical Configuration for Adobe Document Services

The installer automatically performs some initial technical configuration steps for Adobe Document Services (ADS) during the installation. However, you might have to perform these steps manually if you want to change existing parameters or if you want to set additional parameters.

The installer performs the following steps:

● The installer creates user ADSUser in AS ABAP for basic authentication and assigns it to group ADSCallers.For more information about this user, see Ensuring User Security [page 128].

● The installer creates user ADSUser in AS Java for basic authentication and assigns it to group ADSCallers.For more information about this user, see Ensuring User Security [page 128].

● The installer creates service user ADS_AGENT in the ABAP environment.● The installer creates an ABAP connection for basic authentication.● The installer creates destination service FP_ICF_DATA_<SAPSID>.● The installer sets up basic authentication in the Java environment.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 163

Page 164: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

More Information

For more information about how to perform these steps manually, see SAP Help Portal at the following locations:

Release SAP Help Portal Path

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 1● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 2

https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER SAP

NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package>

Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Configuration and Deployment Information Technology

Consultant’s Guide: English Business Task Management

Adobe Document Services (Configuration) Adobe

Document Services Configuration Guide Configuring the

Web Service Securing Access to the Web Service

Configuration of the Web Service for Basic Authentication

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 3 https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER_703

Application Help Application Help SAP NetWeaver

by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Adobe Document Services Configuration Guide

Configuring the Web Service Securing Access to the Web

Service Configuration of the Web Service for Basic

Authentication

7.9.1.2 Initial Technical Configuration for Composite Application Framework Core (CAF)

The installer automatically performs some initial technical configuration steps for Composite Application Framework Core (CAF) during the installation. However, you might have to perform these steps manually if you want to change existing parameters or if you want to set additional parameters.

The installer performs the following steps:

● The installer creates the following roles with the required User Management Engine (UME) actions:○ CAFAdmin○ CAFUIAdmin

For more information about how to perform this step manually, see SAP Help Portal at:https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Configuration Technology Consultant’s Guide Developing, Configuring, and Adapting Applications Creating Composite Applications Composite Application Framework Core Configuration Guide Setting Up Roles

164 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 165: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● The installer configures CAF runtime properties for SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse (BW) integration.For more information about how to perform this step manually, see SAP Help Portal at:https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Configuration Technology Consultant’s Guide Developing, Configuring, and Adapting Applications Creating Composite Applications Composite Application Framework Core Configuration Guide Configuring CAF Core for BW Integration Configuring CAF Runtime Properties for BW Integration

● The installer configures CAF runtime properties for knowledge management integration.For more information about how to perform this step manually, see SAP Help Portal at:https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Configuration Technology Consultant’s Guide Developing, Configuring, and Adapting Applications Creating Composite Applications Composite Application Framework Core Configuration Guide Configuring CAF Core for Knowledge Management Integration Configuring CAF Repository Managers Configuring CAF Runtime Properties

● The installer creates data sources to extract custom enumeration types.For more information about how to perform this step manually, see SAP Help Portal at:http://help.sap.com/nw SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package>Development SAP NetWeaver Developer’s Guide Fundamentals Creating Composite ApplicationsDeveloping Composite Applications with CAF Core Integration CAF Core and SAP Business Information Warehouse Integration DataSource Use in CAF and SAP BW Integration DataSources to Extract Custom Enumeration Types

7.9.1.3 Initial Technical Configuration for the System Landscape Directory (SLD)

The installer automatically performs some initial technical configuration steps for the System Landscape Directory (SLD) during the installation. However, you might have to perform these steps manually if you want to change existing parameters or if you want to set additional parameters.

● If you choose option Register in existing central SLD, the installer automatically configures the connection of the system being installed to an existing central SLD.For more information about how to perform these steps manually, see:https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_NETWEAVER SAP NetWeaver 7.0 <Including Enhancement Package> Application Help SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software Life Cycle Management System Landscape Directory Configuring Systems to Connect to SLD

● If you choose option Configure a local SLD, the installer automatically sets up and configures a local SLD during the installation.For more information about how to perform these steps manually, see the documentation Post Installation Guide – System Landscape Directory of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 which you can find on the System Landscape Directory (SLD) - Overview page at https://wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/display/SL/System+Landscape+Directory+%28SLD%29+-+Overview .

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 165

Page 166: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.9.2 Initial Technical Configuration for Process Integration (PI)

The installer automatically performs initial PI-specific technical configuration steps during the installation. However, you might have to perform some of these steps manually if you upgraded your SAP system to the current release. The following steps might be required.

Related Information

Importing the SAP Exchange Profile [page 166]Assigning SAP_ALL Rights to User PISUPER [page 168]Activating the ICF Services [page 168]Assigning Roles to Groups [page 169]

7.9.2.1 Importing the SAP Exchange Profile

The installer automatically imports the SAP Exchange Profile. However, you might have to perform some of these steps manually if you upgraded your SAP system to the current release. The following steps might be required.

Context

NoteIf the installer has finished successfully, the exchange_profile.xml file does not exist in your system. In this case, you can skip this procedure.

Procedure

1. On your PI server host, open the following URL:

http://<J2EE_Host>:<J2EE_Port>/exchangeProfile.

The following naming convention applies to <J2EE_Port>:

5<J2EE_Instance_Number>00

If your J2EE instance, is 00, the <J2EE_Port> is 50000.

166 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 167: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

2. Enter the logon information:

User Name: PISUPER

Password: <Pisuper_Password>

The Exchange Profile page appears.3. Choose Connection.

The Server Settings page appears.4. Enter the required information for the PI host.

Use the logon information of user PILDUSER.

5. Choose Save.

The Exchange Profile page appears.6. Choose Import.

The Import Profile page appears.7. Choose Browse and select the following file:

CautionIf you cannot run a Web Browser on your PI host, you need to copy the file exchange_profile.xml from the PI host to a host where a Web browser runs.

8. Choose Import Data.

The profile is imported.

Next Steps

CautionSince the file exchange_profile.xml contains secure information like passwords, we highly recommend that you delete the file after importing or save it with high security standards, such as encryption.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 167

Page 168: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.9.2.2 Assigning SAP_ALL Rights to User PISUPER

The installer automatically assigns SAP_ALL rights to user PISUPER. However, you might have to perform some of these steps manually if you upgraded your SAP system to the current release. The following steps might be required.

Procedure

1. Log on to your SAP NetWeaver Application Server for ABAP host as a user with SAP_ALL rights (use DDIC or SAP*).

2. Call transaction SU01.

3. Select user PISUPER.

4. Navigate to the Profiles tab and switch to edit mode.5. In the Profile row , add SAP_ALL.

6. Save your settings.

7.9.2.3 Activating the ICF Services

The installer automatically activates the ICF services. However, you might have to perform some of these steps manually if you upgraded your SAP system to the current release. The following steps might be required.

Context

The Internet Communication Framework (ICF) is an HTTP framework that provides an ABAP interface for HTTP requests. Using ICF services, the SAP NetWeaver Application Server can use the HTTP protocol for remote communication as client and as server.

Procedure

To activate the ICF services, call transaction SE38 and execute the report RSXMB_ACTIVATE_ICF_SERVICES.

168 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 169: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.9.2.4 Assigning Roles to Groups

The installer automatically assigns roles to groups. However, you might have to perform some of these steps manually if you upgraded your SAP system to the current release. The following steps might be required.

Prerequisites

To assign roles to different groups, start the Visual Administrator of the J2EE Engine.

Procedure

● Assigning Role “Administer” to Group SAP_XI_ADMINISTRATOR

Check whether group SAP_XI_ADMINISTRATOR is assigned to role administer.

If this is not the case, proceed as follows:

a. Choose Cluster Server Services Security Provider sap.com.\com.sap.rprof.remoteprofileexchangeprofile .

b. Select Security Roles.c. Select Administer.d. Select the group SAP_XI_ADMINISTRATOR.e. Choose Add and assign the role administer.f. Save your settings.

● Assigning Security Role “LcrAdministrator” to Group SAP_SLD_ADMINISTRATOR

a. Choose Cluster Server Services Security Provider .

b. On the Runtime tab in the right frame, choose Policy Configuration Component .c. Select sap.com/com.sap.lcr*sld.d. On the right, choose Security Roles and select the role LcrAdministrator.e. Select the role type Security Role.f. In the lower frame, add group SAP_SLD_ADMINISTRATOR.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 169

Page 170: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.10 IBM i-specific Information

7.10.1 Correcting Errors in RFC Steps

Use

RFC steps, which have names starting with RFC such as RFCADDBDIF_IND_DB4, can fail for several reasons:

● The SAP system has not been started up correctly.● The DDIC user has entered the wrong password.● The jobs started by user DDIC cannot be executed.● The SAP job cannot be started or executed in the SAP system.

Procedure

To correct an error in RFC steps, see the following table:

Errors in RFC Steps and Required User Actions

Cause of the Error User Actions

The SAP system has not been started up correctly.

This is indicated by error messages in the files dev_w* and dev_disp. These files are located in the work directory.

Check if the SAP work processes are running by entering the following command:

WRKACTJOB SBS(SAP<Instance_Number><SAPSID>)

The DDIC user has entered the wrong password. Check whether you can log on to the SAP system as user DDIC.

Check whether the password for DDIC is the default pass­word (19920706).

The jobs started by user DDIC cannot be executed. Monitor the jobs started by user DDIC. To do this, use trans­action SM37, paying particular attention to the job RADDBDIF.

To look at the system log for detailed information, use trans­action SM21.

170 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 171: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Cause of the Error User Actions

The SAP job cannot be started or executed in the SAP sys­tem.

Check whether user <SAPSID>ADM has write permissions for directories /usr/sap/trans and /usr/sap/trans/tmp.

If directory /usr/sap/trans is located on another IBM i and is shared by QFileSvr.400, make sure that the user<SAPSID>ADM exists on the remote system and has the same passwords on both systems.

NoteInstallation step RFCRADDBDIF_IND_DB4 also writes log file /usr/sap/trans/tmp/RADDBDIF.<SAPSID>, which contains additional information about the status of the executed reports.

7.10.2 IBM i Library Structure

Definition

Libraries form the primary native organizational structure on IBM i. A library is an object that groups together related objects.

There are three different types of libraries:

● System libraries, such as library QSYS for objects supplied as part of the operating system● User libraries, such as the various libraries:

IBM i Library Structure

Library Description

SAP<SAPSID>IND Kernel Library for ILE programs and commands

SAP<SAPSID>I<Instance_Number> Instance-specific kernel library

SAP<SAPSID>M#<xx> Library for menu objects

R3<SAPSID>DATA Database library

R3<SAPSIDD>JRN Journal receiver library

SAP<SAPSID>DB Java database library

SAP<SAPSID>JRN Java journal receiver library

R3<SAPSID>400 Library for work management objects

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 171

Page 172: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Library Description

R3<Release>ARFC Library for RFC SDK (ASCII)

R3<Release>ACPIC Library for CPI-C SDK (ASCII)

R3WRK<Instance_Number> Internal SAP library

R3* or SAP* Reserved for SAP

Q* System libraries

Note<SAPSID> is the SAP system ID (for example PRD or TST).

<Release> is the SAP release (for example, 700).

<Instance_Number> is the instance number.

<x> is a number.

● Product libraries, such as library QPDA, which contains objects associated with the IBM i Programming Development Manager (PDM)

NoteSome of the SAP library names might vary if you assign your own library names.

Types of objects stored in libraries include, for example, files and programs.

Files do not contain the actual data. The data is stored in members within each file. In SQL systems, such as SAP systems, each file contains usually one member.

7.10.3 IBM i Integrated File System

Use

Definition

The IBM i also provides a UNIX-style and PC-style integrated file system that provides enhanced capabilities for managing new types of information processing including client/server, open systems, and multimedia.

Use

The integrated file system supports the use of stream files for storing and operating on data. Stream files are files containing a continuous stream of data. This data might take the form of text files or images, for example. Stream files are system objects with object type *STMF.

For information about displaying or editing stream files, see Editing Stream Files [page 176].

172 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 173: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Structure

The IBM i integrated file system has a hierarchy comparable to that used by UNIX. The integrated file system treats the different types of support for accessing the various object types as separate file systems. Some of these file systems are required for an SAP system such as:

IBM i Integrated File System

File System Description

“/” This file system corresponds to the UNIX root directory. This PC-style file system is not case-sensitive.

QOpenSys The open systems file system. This UNIX-style file system is case-sensitive. Used by PASE for example.

QSYS.LIB The library file system allowing the user to access objects residing in native IBM i libra­ries using IFS commands.

QOPT The optical file system; this file system is mainly used during installation and contains all media that have been inserted so far.

QFileSvr.400 This file system provides access to other file systems on remote systems. It is used by several SAP functions, for example correction and transport, to access remote stream files.

CautionTake care with upper- and lowercase notation. The “/” file system is not case sensitive, but QOpenSys and the contents of SAP profiles are case sensitive.

Integration

The integrated file system distinguishes between two different types of link: hard links and soft links. A link is a named connection between a directory and an object.

Hard and Soft Links

Type of Link Description

Hard link, also known as link, absolute link ● Is indicated by a separate directory entry● Cannot exist unless linked to an object● Cannot cross file systems

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 173

Page 174: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Type of Link Description

Soft link, also known as symbolic link ● Takes the form of a path name contained in a file● Can exist without pointing to an existing object● Is an object of type *SYMLNK● Can be removed without affecting the object● Can cross file systems● Is only allowed in the IFS

NoteTo see the contents of a symbolic link, use WRKLNK with Detail option *EXTENDED. (This command corresponds to the UNIX command ls -l.) Enter option 12 (Work with links).

NoteThe SAP system uses soft links by default.

7.10.4 Restoring a Backup

Use

You can restore a backup in the sequence given below.

Prerequisites

You have a full backup.

Procedure

1. Control the panel function.2. Perform an initial program load (IPL) or Install System Menu.3. To restore a user profile or profiles saved with the command

SAVSYS (Save System) or SAVSECDTA (Save Security Data), enter the following command:RSTUSRPRF (Restore User Profile)

4. To restore to the system a configuration object saved with the SAVSYS (Save System) or SAVCFG (Save Configuration) command, enter the following command:RSTCFG (Restore Configuration)

174 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 175: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

5. To restore libraries saved with the SAVLIB command with LIB(*NONSYS) specified, enter the following command:RSTLIB SAVLIB(*NONSYS) (Restore Library)

6. To restore documents, folders, and distribution objects, enter the following command:RSTDLO (Restore Document Library Object)

7. To restore a copy of an object or objects that can be used in the Integrated File System, enter the following command:RST DEV('/qsys.lib/tap01.devd')OBJ(('*' *INCLUDE) ('\qsys.lib' *OMIT) ('\qdls' *OMIT))

8. To restore saved changes in libraries, documents, and directories, enter the following command:RSTLIB, RSTOBJ, RSTDLO, RST

9. To apply journaled changes (for a particular database file member) to recover the file, enter the following command:APYJRNCHG (Apply Journaled Changes)

10. To restore private authorities to user profiles, enter the following command:RSTAUT (Restore Authority)

Restore Procedures

NoteThe Restore Objects (RSTOBJ) command can be used where the Restore Library (RSTLIB) command is shown to restore objects.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 175

Page 176: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

For more information, see the IBM documentation IBM i Systems Management Recovering Your System <release> (SC41–5304–10) in the IBM Knowledge Center.

7.10.5 Editing Stream Files

Use

Stream files are files containing a continuous stream of data. Stream files are used, for example, to store documents and images. On IBM i, SAP profiles are stored in stream files.

Procedure

You can access IBM i stream files and directories in a number of different ways.

● Using the Command EDTFEDTF is an editor similar to SEU (Source Entry Unit). The prefix area of each record accepts the edit command. To display the edit commands available, press F1 .

● Using IBM i NetServerThe IBM i NetServer is included in the operating system since V4R2M0. This provides, similar to Windows, shares that can be mapped with every Windows client. You can configure these shares with a free-of-charge option of the IBM i Navigator on IBM i Access for Windows and with the IBM Systems Director Navigator for i. Since V4R4M0 you can configure a character-by-character conversion from ASCII to EBCDIC and vice versa.

● Using IBM Systems Director Navigator for iThe IBM Systems Director Navigator for i is included in the operating system since V6R1M0. This provides similar access to the file systems, including IBM i NetServer support, as with the IBM i Navigator on IBM i Access for Windows.

● Using IBM i Access for WindowsIf you have IBM i Navigator on IBM i Access for Windows, you can also access stream files using this product. Using the Network Drive feature of IBM i Access for Windows and the capability of IBM i Access for Windows to perform a character-by-character conversion from ASCII to EBCDIC and vice versa, you can work on the IBM i IFS in the same way as on the PC file system. That is, you can create, edit, and delete files and directories with all the restrictions that apply to IBM i Access for Windows.

7.10.6 RFC SDK

Note

To install the RFC SDK, see SAP Note 1097997 .

176 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 177: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

After you have installed the optional AddOn RFC SDK on your IBM i, the library R3<REL>RFC contains the Remote Function Call Software Development Kit (RFC SDK) and the C++ Remote Function Call Software Development Kit (CRFC SDK). (<REL> stands for the current SAP Release, for example 700).

The RFC SDK provides an open programming interface, which can be used to provide non-SAP-applications direct access to SAP functions.

The RFC SDK examples and test programs are no longer available in the 7.20 SDK. You must use the source code from an older release and re-compile the programs on your own.

Activities: Compiling and Linking an RFC Program on IBM i

To create an executable, use the commands CRTMOD, CRTPGM.

ExampleHow to create the executable sapinfo:

ADDLIBLE LIB(R3<REL>RFC)

CRTCMOD MODULE(SAPINFO) SRCFILE(R3<REL>RFC/C)

OUTPUT(*PRINT)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 177

Page 178: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

OPTION(*SYSINCPATH *SHOWUSR *EXPMAC)

DBGVIEW(*SOURCE) DEFINE(‘SAPonOS400’) SYSIFCOPT(*IFSIO)

CRTPGM PGM(SAPINFO) MODULE(SAPINFO) BNDSRVPGM(LIBRFC) DETAIL(*FULL)

Note

For more information about RFC SDK functionality on IBM i, see SAP Note 84685 .

7.11 Deleting an SAP System or Single Instances

This section describes how to delete a complete SAP system or single SAP instances with the Uninstall option of the installer.

Prerequisites

● You have installed your SAP system with standard SAP tools according to the installation documentation.● You are logged on as user QSECOFR or as a user that has the same authorizations as QSECOFR.

CautionDo not use the <sapsid>adm user to delete the SAP system.

● Make sure that the SAP system, or single instance, or standalone engine, or optional standalone unit to be deleted is down and that you are not logged on as one of the SAP system users. If there is a lock on one of the SAP system objects, the uninstall fails. Make also sure that all SAP-related processes are stopped.

NoteYou do not have to stop the SAP Host Agent. The SAP Host Agent is stopped automatically during the uninstall process.

● Make sure that there are no open sessions by one of the SAP system users when starting the uninstall.

Context

Note the following when deleting an SAP system:

● You cannot delete an SAP system remotely.● If you delete network-wide users or groups in an environment with Network Information System (NIS),

other SAP installations might also be affected. Before you delete users or groups, make sure that they are no longer required.

178 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 179: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

● During the uninstall process, all file systems and subdirectories of the selected SAP system or single instance are deleted. Before you start uninstalling, check that you have saved a copy of all files and directories that you want to keep in a secure location.

● The uninstall process is designed to remove as much as possible of the SAP system to be deleted. If an item cannot be removed, a message informs you that you have to remove this item manually. You can do this either at once or after the uninstall process has finished. As soon as you confirm the message, the uninstall process continues.

NoteIf uninstalling a system from an independent ASP after removal ensure that the following directories have been removed:

/<IASP_Name>/usr/sap/<SAPSID> and /<IASP_Name>/sapmnt/<SAPSID>

Procedure

1. Start the installer as described in Running the Installer [page 98].

2. On the Welcome screen, choose: <Product> Software Life-Cycle Options Uninstall Uninstall - System / Standalone Engine / Optional Standalone Unit

3. Follow the instructions in the installer input dialogs to delete a complete SAP system or single instances.

NoteTo find more information on each parameter during the Define Parameters phase, position the cursor on the required parameter input field , and choose either F1 or the HELP tab. Then the available help text is displayed in the HELP tab.

The following table provides information about deleting a complete system or single instances with the installer.

Deletion of Remarks

Central system You can delete a central system (where all instances reside on the same host), in one installer run.

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 179

Page 180: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Deletion of Remarks

Distributed system You run the installer and delete the required instances or standalone engines.

If you want to delete a distributed system, you have to run the installer to delete the required instances locally on each of the hosts belonging to the SAP system in the fol­lowing sequence:

1. Dialog instances, if there are any

CautionDo not select checkbox Uninstall all instances of the SAP system from this host if you do not want to uninstall the complete SAP system or standalone engine. For example, do not select this checkbox if you only want to uninstall a dialog instance of an existing SAP system distributed over several hosts. Otherwise the contents of mounted global directories under /<sapmnt>/<SAPSID>/ , such as instance profiles and kernel executables, are also deleted.

2. All SAP instances that are installed on IBM i.3. Central instance4. Enqueue Replication Server5. ABAP central services instance (ASCS instance)6. Central services instance (SCS)

NoteThe uninstall uses the SAP kernel tool DLTR3INST and DLTR3SYS. Whenever these tools fail to delete an object on IBM i, this object is given to the user SAPGARBAGE. SAP system objects are also given to the user SAPGARBAGE when it is not clear if the object should be erased. Finally, check after every uninstall all the objects of SAPGARBAGE using WRKOBJOWN and delete all objects you do not need anymore.

For more information, see SAP Note 936965 .

Dialog instance If you want to delete dialog instances of an existing SAP system, you have to run the installer to delete them locally on each dialog instance host.

Standalone SAP Host Agent The SAP Host Agent is automatically uninstalled from a host together with the last re­maining SAP system instance.

If you want to uninstall a standalone SAP Host Agent, deselect Profiles Available and select Uninstall Standalone SAP Host Agent on the General SAP System Parameters screen.

4. When you have finished, delete the relevant directory structure on the global host.5. To remove obsolete SLD data, see More on System Landscape Directory at: https://wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/

display/SL/More+on+System+Landscape+Directory How-to Manage House-Cleaning in the System Landscape Directory - Duplicate System Entries

180 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 181: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

7.12 Deleting an SAP System on IBM i

Use

This section describes how to delete an SAP system that is installed on IBM i. This is an alternative way to delete an SAP system to installer.

CautionThis description assumes that the installation of your SAP system has been performed using SAP standard tools according to the installation documentation.

Procedure

1. Make sure that you deleted all remote instances that belong to this system. You can not delete the SAP system when still a remote instance exists.

NoteYou no longer have to delete all local instances first before deleting the SAP system like in the past. This can now be done in one step.

For more information, see Deleting an SAP Instance [page 183].2. To add the kernel library to the library list enter the following command:

ADDLIBLE LIB(SAP<SAPSID>IND).

CautionIf you want to delete a complete ABAP+Java system but not the ABAP + Java database instance, delete all instances but do not delete the system (on the database instance host) at the end.

3. Make sure that your entire SAP system is down using the following command:STOPSAP SID(<SAPSID>) INSTANCE(*ALL) STARTUPSRV(*ALL) XDNLISTEN(*YES) WAIT(*YES) WAITTIME(600) ENDSBS(*YES)

4. To delete an SAP system, enter the following command:DLTR3SYS SID(<SAPSID>)

NoteIf you want to delete the entire SAP system and all local instances, related directories, and files enter the following command:

DLTR3SYS SID(<SAPSID>) DLTINST(*YES) DLTGLB(*YES) DLTHOME(*YES)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 181

Page 182: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

RecommendationWe recommend that you check the parameters of DLTR3SYS. You might want to use some parameters selectively such as DLTINST,DLTGLB, DLTHOME, or USROWNOBJ. For more information, see SAP Note 936965 .

5. If the following directories and files exist, delete them by entering the following command:WRKLNKSAP○ /usr/sap/trans/cofiles/*<SAPSID>*○ /usr/sap/trans/data/*<SAPSID>*○ /usr/sap/trans/log/*<SAPSID>*○ /usr/sap/trans/buffer/*<SAPSID>*

Choose 4 (Remove) on every file which is found by the command WRKLNKSAP.

ExampleFor example, for directory /usr/sap/trans/data, enter the following command:

WRKLNKSAP DIR('/usr/sap/trans/data/*<SAPSID>*')

Choose 4 (Remove) on the listed files.

NoteTo limit the command WRKLNKSAP, choose Subset (in the upper right part on the screen).

6. If the following directories exist, delete them by entering the following commands:RMVDIR DIR('/sapmnt/<SAPSID>') SUBTREE(*ALL)RMVDIR DIR('/usr/sap/trans/config/<SAPSID>') SUBTREE(*ALL)

NoteIf you are removing a system from an independent ASP also delete the contents from the following directories:

RMVDIR DIR('/<IASP_Name>/usr/sap/<SAPSID>') SUBTREE(*ALL)

RMVDIR DIR('/<IASP_Name>/sapmnt/<SAPSID>') SUBTREE(*ALL)

7. If the kernel library of the system you just deleted was only used by the deleted system, you can remove it.○ To remove the kernel library from the library list, enter the following command:

RMVLIBLE LIB(SAP<SAPSID>IND)○ To delete the kernel library, enter the following command:

DLTLIB LIB(SAP<SAPSID>IND)

NoteWhen you encounter errors using DLTR3SYS use the command DSPJOBLOG to correct the problem. Objects with locks usually cause an error. After deleting an object lock using the command WRKOBJLCK, you can start DLTR3SYS again to continue deleting your instance.

182 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 183: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Result

The SAP system is now deleted. If you want to reinstall an SAP system, you can use the same <SAPSID> as the one of the SAP system you deleted.

7.13 Deleting an SAP Instance

Use

This section describes how to delete SAP instances that are installed on IBM i. This is an alternative way to delete an SAP instance by installer.

CautionIf you delete an entire SAP system, you have to first delete the remote instances one by one. All local instances and the SAP system can be deleted at the same time using the command DLTR3SYS. For more information, see Deleting an SAP System on IBM i [page 181].

CautionThis description assumes that the installation of your SAP system has been performed using SAP standard tools according to the installation documentation.

Procedure

To delete an instance, log on to the IBM i where the SAP instance you want to delete is installed. To do this, log on as user QSECOFR or as a user that has the same authorizations as QSECOFR.

1. To add the kernel library to the library list enter the following command:ADDLIBLE LIB(SAP<SAPSID>IND)

CautionIf you want to delete a complete ABAP+Java system but not the ABAP + Java database instance, delete all instances but do not delete the system (on the database instance host) at the end.

2. To make sure that the entire SAP instance is down, enter the following command:STOPSAP SID(<SAPSID>) INSTANCE(<Instance_Number>) STARTUPSRV(*ALL) XDNLISTEN(*YES) WAIT(*YES) WAITTIME(600) ENDSBS(*YES)

3. To delete an entire SAP instance, enter the following command:DLTR3INST SID(<SAPSID>) INST(<Instance_Number>)

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAdditional Information P U B L I C 183

Page 184: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

RecommendationWe recommend that you check the parameters of DLTR3INST. You might want to use some parameters selectively like for example DLTINST, DLTHOME or USROWNOBJ. For more information, see SAP Note 936965 .

NoteIf there is no instance of an SAP system (especially the database instance host) remaining on the IBM i host, you can delete the rest of the file structures, the ABAP database and/or the Java database etc. of the SAP system by using the command DLTR3SYS on the host. This will not delete any instance of the SAP system on any other IBM i host. For more information, see Deleting an SAP System on IBM i [page 181].

NoteWhen you encounter errors using DLTR3INST use the command DSPJOBLOG to correct the problem. Objects with locks usually cause an error. After deleting an object lock using the command WRKOBJLCK, you can start DLTR3INST again to continue deleting your instance.

184 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Additional Information

Page 185: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

A Appendix

A.1 Online Information from SAP

More information is available online as follows:

Title Internet Address

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iAppendix P U B L I C 185

Page 186: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Coding SamplesAny software coding and/or code lines / strings ("Code") included in this documentation are only examples and are not intended to be used in a productive system environment. The Code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules of certain coding. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the Code given herein, and SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the usage of the Code, unless damages were caused by SAP intentionally or by SAP's gross negligence.

Gender-Neutral LanguageAs far as possible, SAP documentation is gender neutral. Depending on the context, the reader is addressed directly with "you", or a gender-neutral noun (such as "sales person" or "working days") is used. If when referring to members of both sexes, however, the third-person singular cannot be avoided or a gender-neutral noun does not exist, SAP reserves the right to use the masculine form of the noun and pronoun. This is to ensure that the documentation remains comprehensible.

Internet HyperlinksThe SAP documentation may contain hyperlinks to the Internet. These hyperlinks are intended to serve as a hint about where to find related information. SAP does not warrant the availability and correctness of this related information or the ability of this information to serve a particular purpose. SAP shall not be liable for any damages caused by the use of related information unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct. All links are categorized for transparency (see: https://help.sap.com/viewer/disclaimer).

186 P U B L I C

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for i

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Page 187: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

Installation of SAP Systems Based on the Application Server Dual-Stack (ABAP+Java) of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 to 7.02 on IBM i : IBM Db2 for iImportant Disclaimers and Legal Information P U B L I C 187

Page 188: IBM Db2 for i - SAP Help Portal · PDF fileInstalling the Qshell.....62 Checking and Adjusting Operating System Values .....63 Adjusting

go.sap.com/registration/contact.html

© 2018 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary.These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.Please see https://www.sap.com/corporate/en/legal/copyright.html for additional trademark information and notices.